6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION RELAY
GRE130
© TOSHIBA Corporation 2011
All Rights Reserved.
( Ver. 1.1 )
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Safety Precautions
Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GRE130. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Explanation of symbols used
Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or
serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or
serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
minor injury or moderate injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
property damage.
 1 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
DANGER
 Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated
is dangerous.
 Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit immediately after switching off the power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
CAUTION
 Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION
 Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust
detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
 Ratings
Before applying AC voltage or the power supply to the equipment, check that they conform to the
equipment ratings.
 Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.
 External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
 Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
 Power supply
If a power supply has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then all fault records,
event records and disturbance records and the internal clock may be cleared soon after restoring
the power. This is because the back-up RAM may have discharged and may contain uncertain
data.
 Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
 Disposal
This product does not contain expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled. When disposing
of this equipment, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations as an industrial waste. If
any points are unclear, please contact our sales representatives.
 2 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Contents
Safety Precautions
1
1. Introduction
6
2. Application Notes
8
2.1 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection
2.1.1 Phase Overvoltage Protection
2.1.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection
2.1.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection
2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection
2.2 Frequency Protection
2.2.1 Frequency element
2.2.2 Frequency rate-of-change element
2.3 Trip and Alarm Signal Output
3. Technical Description
8
8
12
16
19
22
22
22
27
29
3.1 Hardware Description
3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules
3.2 Input and Output Signals
3.2.1 AC Input Signals
3.2.2 Binary Input Signals
3.2.3 Binary Output Signals
3.3 Automatic Supervision
3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring
3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision
3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring
3.3.5 Failure Alarms
3.3.6 Trip Blocking
3.3.7 Setting
3.4 Recording Function
3.4.1 Fault Recording
3.4.2 Event Recording
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording
3.5 Metering Function
4. User Interface
29
29
31
31
31
34
36
36
36
37
38
39
40
40
41
41
41
42
44
45
4.1 Outline of User Interface
4.1.1 Front Panel
4.1.2 Communication Ports
4.2 Operation of the User Interface
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays
4.2.2 Relay Menu
4.2.3 Displaying Records
4.2.4 Status Display
 3 
45
45
47
48
48
51
53
60
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings
4.2.6 Changing the Settings
4.2.7 Control
4.2.8 Testing
Personal Computer Interface
Modbus Interface
Clock Function
Special Mode
5. Installation
64
66
97
99
102
102
102
103
105
5.1 Receipt of Relays
5.2 Relay Mounting
5.2.1 Flush Mounting
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge
5.4 Handling Precautions
5.5 External Connections
105
105
105
107
107
107
6. Commissioning and Maintenance
6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests
6.2 Cautions
6.2.1 Safety Precautions
6.2.2 Precautions for Testing
6.3 Preparations
6.4 Hardware Tests
6.4.1 User Interfaces
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuits
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuits
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits
6.5 Function Test
6.5.1 Measuring Element
6.5.2 Protection Scheme
6.5.3 Metering and Recording
6.6 Conjunctive Tests
6.6.1 On Load Test
6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test
6.7 Maintenance
6.7.1 Regular Testing
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit
6.7.4 Resumption of Service
6.7.5 Storage
7. Putting Relay into Service
108
108
108
108
109
110
111
111
111
112
113
114
114
119
120
120
120
120
122
122
122
123
123
123
124
 4 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix A
125
Signal List
125
Appendix B
133
Event Record Items
133
Appendix C
139
Binary Output Default Setting List
Appendix D
139
141
Details of Relay Menu and LCD & Button Operation
Appendix E
141
152
Case Outline
152
Appendix F
154
Typical External Connection
154
Appendix G
160
Relay Setting Sheet
160
Appendix H
170
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)
Appendix I
170
174
Return Repair Form
174
Appendix J
179
Technical Data
179
Appendix K
185
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic
Appendix L
185
188
Modbus: Interoperability
188
Appendix M
212
Ordering
Under/Overvoltage Relay
212
213
 The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver.1.1)
 5 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
1. Introduction
GRE130 series relays provide overvoltage and undervoltage protection for distribution
substations, generators, motors and transformers.
The GRE130 provides the following protection schemes.
 Overvoltage and undervoltage protection with definite time or inverse time characteristics
 Instantaneous overvoltage and undervoltage protection
The GRE130 series provides the following protection schemes.
 Zero phase sequence overvoltage protection
 Negative phase sequence overvoltage protection
The GRE130 series provides the following functions.
 Two settings groups
 Configurable binary inputs and outputs
 Circuit breaker control and condition monitoring
 Control hierarchy change
 Trip circuit supervision
 Automatic self-supervision
 Menu-based HMI system
 Configurable LED indication
 Metering and recording functions
 Front mounted USB port for PC communications
 Rear mounted RS485 serial port for communication
 Rear mounted RJ45 port for Optional Connection
GRE130 provides continuous monitoring of internal circuits and of software. External circuits are
also monitored, by trip circuit supervision and CB condition monitoring features.
A user-friendly HMI is provided through a backlit LCD, programmable LEDs, keypad and
menu-based operating system. PC access is also provided, either for local connection via a
front-mounted USB port, or for remote connection via a rear-mounted RS485 port. The
communication system allows the user to read and modify the relay settings, and to access data
gathered by the relay’s metering and recording functions. Further, data communication with
substation control and automation systems is supported according to the MODBUS RTU.
Table 1.1.1 shows the members of the GRE130 series and identifies the functions to be provided
by each member.
 6 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Functions
GRE130 -
Model Number
410
[APPL] setting
1PP
1PN
2PP
2PZ
3PP
3PN
3PV
O/V IDMT







O/V DT







U/V IDMT







U/V DT







ZPS IDMT



*

ZPS DT



*

NPS IDMT





NPS DT





FRQ






DFRQ






Trip circuit supervision







Self supervision







CB state monitoring







Trip counter alarm







Multiple settings groups







Metering







Fault records







Event records







Disturbance records







MODBUS RTU
communication







[APPL]setting; 1PP: single phase-to-phase voltage
1PN: single phase-to-neutral voltage
2PP: two phase-to-phase voltage
2PZ: two phase-to-phase voltage with zero phase voltage input
3PP: three phase-to-phase voltage
3PN: three phase-to-neutral voltage
3PV: three phase-to-neutral voltage with zero phase voltage input
Ve: zero phase sequence voltage V0
IDMT: inverse definite minimum time
DT: definite time
O/V: overvoltage protection
U/V: undervoltage protection
ZPS: zero phase sequence overvoltage
NPS: negative phase sequence overvoltage
FRQ: Frequency protection
DFRQ: Frequency rate-of-change protection
(): V0 calculated from three phase voltages
CAUTION: Do not change the APPL setting under service condition of the relay.
 7 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2. Application Notes
2.1
Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection
2.1.1
Phase Overvoltage Protection
GRE130 provides three independent phase overvoltage elements with programmable
dropoff/pickup(DO/PU) ratio. OV1 and OV2 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or
definite time (DT) operation. OV3 has definite time characteristic only.
Figure 2.1.1 shows the characteristic of overvoltage elements.
Pickup
Dropoff
0
Figure 2.1.1
V
Characteristic of Overvoltage Elements
The overvoltage protection element OV1 and OV2 have the IDMT characteristic defined by
equation (1) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

 
k

  c
t (G )  TMS   
a
 
 V
 1 
 
  Vs
(1)
 
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),
V = energising voltage (V),
Vs = overvoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.2. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure
2.1.2, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [OV1EN] and [OV2EN]. If
required, set the scheme switch [OVEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These
curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.
Table 2.1.1 Specification of Inverse Time Curves
Curve Description
k
a
c
“IDMT”
1
1
0
“C” (User Configurable)
0.000 – 30.000
by 0.001 step
0.00 – 5.00
by 0.01 step
0.000 – 5.000
by 0.001 step
 8 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Overvoltage Inverse Time
Curves
1000.000
Operating Time (secs)
100.000
10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
1.000
TMS = 1
0.100
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
Figure 2.1.2
IDMT Characteristic
The OV3 element is used for definite time overvoltage protection.
Definite time reset
The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the OV1 and OV2 elements when the
inverse time delay is used.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no
intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage falls below the reset threshold, the
element returns to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising voltage exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping,
then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising voltage falls below the
reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing
function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
Both OV1 and OV2 have a programmable drop off/pickup(DO/PU) ratio.
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.1.3 to 2.1.5show the scheme logic of the overvoltage protection OV1 to OV3.
The OV1 protection allows the user to select either a definite time or an inverse time characteristic
as shown in Figure 2.1.3. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “DT”, and
trip signal OV1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TOV1. The inverse time
protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal OV1 TRIP is given.
The OV2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
 9 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Figure 2.1.4. The scheme logic of OV2 is the same as that of the OV1.
Figure 2.1.5 and Figure 2.1.5 show the scheme logic of the definite time overvoltage protection
OV3. The OV3 gives alarm signals OV3_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TOV3.
The OV1 to OV3 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [OV1EN] to [OV3EN].
OV1 2()
64
3()
65
1()
TOV1
63
1()
51
&
&
t
0
&
&
t
0
&
&
t
0
102
1
103
1
104
1
OV1 2() 52
INST
53
3()
OV1-B_TRIP
OV1-C_TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
&
[OV1EN] "DT"
OV1-A_TRIP
1
101
OV1_TRIP
1
&
+
"IDMT"
15
OV1_BLOCK
1
&
Figure 2.1.3
OV2 2()
67
3()
68
OV2 2()
INST
3()
TOV2
66
1()
1()
OV1 Overvoltage Protection
57
&
&
t
0
&
&
t
0
&
&
t
0
109
1
110
1
111
1
58
OV2-A_TRIP
OV2-B_TRIP
OV2-C_TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
59
&
[OV2EN] "DT"
1
108
OV2_TRIP
1
&
+
"IDMT"
16
OV2_BLOCK
1
&
Figure 2.1.4
1()
TOV3
69
OV3 2()
70
3()
71
[OV3EN]
+
OV3_BLOCK
OV2 Overvoltage Protection
17
&
&
t
0
116
&
&
t
0
117
&
&
t
0
118
0.00 - 300.00s
1
Figure 2.1.5
OV3 Overvoltage Protection
()Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:
 10 
1
115
OV3-A_ALARM
OV3-B_ ALARM
OV3-C_ ALARM
OV3_ ALARM
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Phase
[APPL] setting
1PP
1PN
2PP / 2PZ
3PN / 3PV
3PP
1
phase-to-phase
phase-to-neutral
A - B phase
A phase
A - B phase
2
－
－
B - C phase
B phase
B - C phase
3
－
－
－
C phase
C - A phase
Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the overvoltage protection and their setting
ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
OV1
10.0 – 200.0 V
0.1 V
120.0 V
OV1 threshold setting
TOV1M
0.05 – 100.00
0.01
1.00
OV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV1EN] = IDMT.
TOV1
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
OV1 definite time setting. Required if [OV1EN] = DT.
TOV1R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
OV1 definite time delayed reset.
OV1DPR
10 – 98 %
1%
95 %
OV1 DO/PU ratio setting.
OV2
10.0 – 200.0 V
0.1 V
140.0 V
OV2 threshold setting
TOV2M
0.05 – 100.00
0.01
1.00
OV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV2EN] = IDMT.
TOV2
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
OV2 definite time setting. Required if [OV2EN] = DT.
TOV2R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
OV2 definite time delayed reset.
OV2DPR
10 – 98 %
1%
95 %
OV2 DO/PU ratio setting.
OV3
10.0 – 200.0 V
0.1 V
140.0 V
OV3 threshold setting.
TOV3
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
OV3 definite time setting.
OV3DPR
10 - 98 %
1%
95 %
OV3 DO/PU ratio setting.
[OV1EN]
Off/DT/IDMT/C
Off
OV1 Enable
[OV2EN]
Off/DT/IDMT/C
Off
OV2 Enable
[OV3EN]
Off / On
Off
OV3 Enable
 11 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2.1.2
Phase Undervoltage Protection
GRE130 provides three independent phase undervoltage elements. UV1 and UV2 are
programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or definite time (DT) operation. UV3 has definite time
characteristic only.
Figure 2.1.7 shows the characteristic of the undervoltage elements.
0
Figure 2.1.7
V
Characteristic of Undervoltage Elements
The undervoltage protection element UV1 has an IDMT characteristic defined by equation (2)
following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

k

t (G )  TMS   
 1  V
Vs

 
 
  c

a 
 
(2)
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),
V = energising voltage (V),
Vs = undervoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.8. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure
2.1.8, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [UV1EN] and [UV2EN]. If
required, set the scheme switch [UVEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These
curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.
The UV3 element is used for definite time overvoltage protection.
Definite time reset
The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the UV1 and UV2 elements when the
inverse time delay is used.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no
intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage rises above the reset threshold, the
element returns to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising voltage is below the undervoltage setting for a transient period without
causing tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising
voltage rises above the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has
travelled) of the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
 12 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Undervoltage Inverse Time
Curves
1000.000
Operating Time (secs)
100.000
TMS = 10
10.000
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
1.000
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
Figure 2.1.8
IDMT Characteristic
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.1.9 to 2.1.11 show the scheme logic of the undervoltage protection UV1 to UV3.
The UV1 protection provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.1.8. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [UV1EN] to “DT”, and trip signal
UV1_TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TUV1. The inverse time protection is
enabled by setting [UV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal UV1_TRIP is given.
The UV2 protection also provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown
in Figure 2.1.10. The scheme logic of UV2 is the same as that of the UV1.
Figure 2.1.11 shows the scheme logic of the definite time undervoltage protection UV3. The UV3
gives alarm signal UV3_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TUV3.
The UV1 to UV3 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [UV1EN] to [UV3EN].
In addition, there is a user programmable voltage threshold VBLK. If all measured phase voltages
drop below this setting, then both UV1 to UV3 are prevented from operating. This function can be
blocked by the scheme switch [VBLKEN]. The [VBLKEN] should be set to “OFF” (not used)
when the UV elements are used as fault detectors, and set to “ON” (used) when used for load
shedding.
Note: The VBLK must be set lower than any other UV setting values.
 13 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
&
&
t
TUV1
0
&
&
t
0
&
&
t
72
1()
UV1 2() 73
74
3()
157
1()
124
1
0
125
1
158
UV1 2()
INST
3()
123
1
UV1-A_TRIP
UV1-B_TRIP
UV1-C_TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
159
UVBLK
1
97
VBLK
1
&
122
UV1_TRIP
&
NON
UVBLK
&
[VBLKEN]
+
"ON"
[UVTST]
&
"OFF"
[UV1EN]
"DT"
1
+
"IDMT"
18
UV1_BLOCK
1
Figure 2.1.9
UV1 Undervoltage Protection
&
&
t
TUV2
0
&
&
t
0
&
&
t
75
1()
UV2
2()
3()
1()
UV2 2()
INST
3()
76
77
177
178
127
1
128
1
0
129
1
NON
UVBLK
UV2-A_TRIP
UV2-B_TRIP
UV2-C_TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
179
[UV2EN] "DT"
1
1
+
&
"IDMT"
19
UV2_BLOCK
&
1
&
Figure 2.1.10
UV2 Undervoltage Protection
TUV3
78
1()
UV3 2()
3()
79
80
&
&
t
0
131
&
&
t
0
132
&
&
t
0
133
[UV3EN]
+
UV3-A_ALARM
UV3-B_ALARM
UV3-C_ALARM
"ON"
0.00 - 300.00s
NON BLK
UV3_BLOCK
20
1
1
Figure 2.1.11
130
UV3_ALARM
UV3 Undervoltage Protection
()Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:
 14 
126
UV2_TRIP
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Phase
[APPL] setting
1PP
1PN
2PP / 2PZ
3PN / 3PV
3PP
1
phase-to-phase
phase-to-neutral
A - B phase
A phase
A - B phase
2
－
－
B - C phase
B phase
B - C phase
3
－
－
－
C phase
C - A phase
Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the undervoltage protection and their setting
ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
UV1
5.0 – 130.0 V
0.1 V
60.0 V
UV1 threshold setting
TUV1M
0.05– 100.00
0.01
1.00
UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV1EN] = IDMT.
TUV1
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV1EN] = DT.
TUV1R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
UV1 definite time delayed reset.
UV2
5.0 – 130.0 V
0.1 V
40.0 V
UV1 threshold setting
TUV2M
0.05– 100.00
0.01
1.00
UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV2EN] = IDMT.
TUV2
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV2EN] = DT.
TUV2R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
UV1 definite time delayed reset.
UV3
5.0 – 130.0 V
0.1 V
40.0 V
UV3 threshold setting.
TUV3
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
UV3 definite time setting.
VBLK
5.0 - 20.0 V
0.1 V
10.0 V
Undervoltage block threshold setting.
[UV1EN]
Off/ DT/ IDMT/
C
DT
UV1 Enable
[VBLKEN]
Off / On
Off
UV block Enable
[UV2EN]
Off/ DT/ IDMT/
C
DT
UV2 Enable
[UV3EN]
Off / On
Off
UV3 Enable
 15 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2.1.3
Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection
The zero phase sequence overvoltage protection (ZPS) is applied to earth fault detection on
unearthed, resistance-earthed system or on ac generators.
The low voltage settings which may be applied make the ZPS element susceptible to any 3rd
harmonic component which may be superimposed on the input signal. Therefore, a 3rd harmonic
filter is provided to suppress such superimposed components.
For earth fault detection, the following two methods are in general use.
 Measuring the zero sequence voltage produced by a VT residual connection (broken-delta
connection) as shown in Figure 2.1.13.
 Measuring the residual voltage across an earthing transformer as shown in Figure 2.114.
A
B
C
GRE130
V0
Figure 2.1.13
A
Earth Fault Detection on Unearthed System
B
G
GRE130
V0
Resistor
Figure 2.1.14
Earth Fault Detection on Generator
Two independent elements ZPS1 and ZPS2 are provided. These elements are programmable for
definite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.
The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (3) following the form described in IEC
60255-127:
 16 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

 

 
k

  c 
t (G )  TMS  

 

  V 0
  V S   1  
(3)
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V0 (seconds),
V0 = Zero sequence voltage (V),
Vs = Zero sequence overvoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.15. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure
2.1.15, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [ZPS1EN] and [ZPS2EN]. If
required, set the scheme switch [ZPSEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c.
These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.
ZPS Overvoltage
Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
Opera ting Time (sec s)
100.000
10.000
1.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
0.100
TMS = 1
0.010
0
5
10
15
20
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
Figure 2.1.15
IDMT Characteristic for ZPS
 17 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Definite time reset
A definite time reset characteristic is applied when the inverse time delay is used. Its operation is
identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.1.16 and 2.1.17 show the scheme logic of the zero-phase sequence overvoltage
protection. Two zero-phase sequence overvoltage elements ZPS1 and ZPS2 with independent
thresholds output trip signals ZPS1 TRIP and ZPS2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TZOV1
and TZPS2.
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [ZPS1EN] and [ZPS2EN].
ZPS1
ZPS1
INST
[ZPS1EN]
TZPS1
93
&
t
&
0
1
197
134
ZPS1 TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
"DT"
1
+
&
"IDMT"
21
ZPS1_BLOCK
1
Figure 2.1.16
ZPS2
ZPS2
INST
[ZPS2EN]
ZPS1 Overvoltage Protection
TZPS2
94
&
&
t
0
1
198
135
ZPS2_ALARM
0.00 - 300.00s
"DT"
1
+
&
"IDMT"
22
ZPS2_BLOCK
1
Figure 2.1.17
ZPS2 Overvoltage Protection
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the zero sequence overvoltage
protection and their setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
ZPS1
1.0 - 130.0 V
0.1V
20.0 V
ZPS1 threshold setting (V0) for tripping.
TZPS1M
0.05 – 100.00
0.01
1.00
ZPS1 time multiplier setting. Required if [ZPS1EN]=IDMT.
TZPS1
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
ZPS1 definite time setting. Required if [ZPS1EN]=DT.
TZPS1R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
ZPS1 definite time delayed reset.
ZPS2
1.0 - 130.0 V
0.1V
40.0 V
ZPS2 threshold setting (V0) for alarming.
TZPS2M
0.05 – 100.00
0.01
1.00
ZPS2 time multiplier setting. Required if [ZPS2EN]=IDMT.
TZPS2
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
ZPS2 definite time setting. Required if [ZPS2EN]=DT.
TZPS2R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
ZPS2 definite time delayed reset.
[ZPS1EN]
Off /DT/ IDMT/ C
DT
ZPS1 Enable
[ZPS2EN]
Off / On
Off
ZPS2 Enable
 18 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2.1.4
Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection
The negative phase sequence overvoltage protection (NPS) is used to detect voltage unbalance
conditions such as reverse-phase rotation, unbalanced voltage supply etc.
The NPS protection is applied to protect three-phase motors from the damage which may be
caused by the voltage unbalance. Unbalanced voltage supply to motors due to a phase loss can
lead to increases in the negative sequence voltage.
The NPS protection is also applied to prevent the starting of the motor in the wrong direction, if
the phase sequence is reversed.
Two independent elements NPS1 and NPS2 are provided. The elements are programmable for
definite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.
The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (4) following the form described in IEC
60255-127.

 

 
k

  c 
t (G )  TMS  


  1 
 V2

 

  V S 
 
(4)
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V2 (seconds),
V2 = Negative sequence voltage (V),
Vs = Negative sequence overvoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.18. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure
2.1.18, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [NPS1EN] and [NPS2EN]. If
required, set the scheme switch [NPSEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c.
These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.
 19 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
NPS Overvoltage
Inverse Time Curves
1000 .000
Operating Time (secs)
100 .000
10 .000
1 .000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
0 .100
TMS = 1
0 .010
0
5
10
15
20
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
Figure 2.1.18
IDMT Characteristic for NPS
Definite time reset
A definite time reset characteristic is applied to the NPS1 element when the inverse time delay is
used. Its operation is identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.1.19 and 2.1.20 show the scheme logic of the negative sequence overvoltage protection.
Two negative sequence overvoltage elements NPS1 and NPS2 with independent thresholds output
trip signals NPS1 TRIP and NPS2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TNPS1 and TNPS2.
The tripping can be disabled using scheme switches [NPS1EN] and [NPS2EN].
NPS1
NPS1
INST
[NPS1EN]
TNPS1
95
&
&
t
0
1
199
136
0.00 - 300.00s
"DT"
1
+
&
"IDMT"
NPS1_BLOCK
23
1
Figure 2.1.19
NPS1 Overvoltage Protection
 20 
NPS1 TRIP
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
NPS2
NPS2
INST
[NPS2EN]
TNPS2
96
&
&
t
0
1
200
137
NPS2_ALARM
0.00 - 300.00s
"DT"
1
+
&
"IDMT"
NPS2_BLOCK
24
1
Figure 2.1.20
NPS2 Overvoltage Protection
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the negative sequence overvoltage
protection and their setting ranges.
The delay time setting TNPS1 and TNPS2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring
elements NPS1 and NPS2. The minimum operating time of the NPS elements is approximately
200ms.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
NPS1
1.0 - 130.0 V
0.1V
20.0 V
NPS1 threshold setting for tripping.
TNPS1M
0.05 – 100.00
0.01
1.00
NPS1 time multiplier setting. Required if [NPS1EN]=IDMT.
TNPS1
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
NPS1 definite time setting. Required if [NPS1EN]=DT.
TNPS1R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
NPS1 definite time delayed reset.
NPS2
1.0 - 130.0 V
0.1V
40.0 V
NPS2 threshold setting for alarming.
TNPS2M
0.05 – 100.00
0.01
1.00
NPS2 time multiplier setting. Required if [NPS2EN]=IDMT.
TNPS2
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
NPS2 definite time setting. Required if [NPS2EN]=DT.
TNPS2R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
NPS2 definite time delayed reset.
[NPS1EN]
Off /DT/ IDMT/ C
Off
NPS1 Enable
[NPS2EN]
Off / On
Off
NPS2 Enable
 21 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2.2
Frequency Protection
For a four-stage frequency protection, GRE130 incorporates dedicated frequency measuring
elements and scheme logic for each stage. Each stage is programmable for underfrequency,
overfrequency or frequency rate-of-change protection.
Underfrequency protection is provided to maintain the balance between the power generation
capability and the loads. It is also used to maintain the frequency within the normal range by load
shedding.
Overfrequency protection is typically applied to protect synchronous machines from possible damage
due to overfrequency conditions.
Frequency rate-of-change protection is applied to ensure that load shedding occurs very quickly
when the frequency change is very rapid.
A-phase to B-phase voltage is used to detect frequency.
2.2.1
Frequency element
Underfrequency element UF operates when the power system frequency falls under the setting
value.
Overfrequency element OF operates when the power system frequency rises over the setting
value.
These elements measure the frequency and check for underfrequency or overfrequency every 5
ms. They operate when the underfrequency or overfrequency condition is detected 16 consecutive
times.
The outputs of both the UF and OF elements is invalidated by undervoltage block element
(FRQBLK) operation during an undervoltage condition.
Figure 2.2.1 shows the characteristics of the UF and OF elements.
Hz
OF
OF setting
UF setting
UF
0
V
FVBLK setting
Figure 2.2.1
2.2.2
Underfrequency and Overfrequency Elements
Frequency rate-of-change element
The frequency rate-of-change element calculates the gradient of frequency change (df/dt).
GRE130 provides two rate-of-change elements, a frequency decay rate element (D) and a
frequency rise rate element (R). These elements measure the change in frequency (Δf) over a time
interval (Δt=100ms), as shown Figure 2.2.2 and calculate the Δf/Δt every 5 ms. They operate
when the frequency change exceeds the setting value 50 consecutive times.
The output of both the D and R elements is invalidated by undervoltage block element
(FRQBLK) operation during undervoltage condition.
 22 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Hz
Δf
Δt
sec
Figure 2.2.2
Frequency Rate-of-Change Element
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.2.3 shows the scheme logic of the frequency protection for stage 1. The first frequency
element F11, the second F12, the frequency rise rate-of-change element DFR1 and frequency
decay rate-of-change element DFD1 can all output a trip command independently under the
condition that the system voltage is higher than the setting of the undervoltage element FVBLK.
F11
F12
DF-R1
DF-D1
231
211
&
&
&
&
212
+
213
[FT1 ]
O
U
B
OO
UU
OFF
1
&
&
214
[DFT1]
FRQ1 BLOCK
42
R
D
BOTH
OFF
F1
E
235
FRQ1 TRIP
F2
Scheme Logic
Selection : [Logic1]
&
+
232
t
0
0.00 – 100.00S
1
&
FVBLK
t
0
0.00 – 100.00S
1
233
234
DFR
DFD
1
1
Figure 2.2.3 FRQ1 Frequency Protection Logic
To apply the various types of frequency protection, the GRE130 has the following three scheme
switches for each stage. For stage 1,
[FT1]:
This switch selects the frequency protection to apply as well as provide the
measuring elements F11 and F12 with an overfrequency or underfrequency
characteristic.
 23 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
[FT1]
F11 / F12 characteristic
Protection selected
setting
F11
F12
O
OF(*)
Overfrequency protection only with F11 element
U
UF(**)
Underfrequency protection only with F11 element
B
OF
UF
Overfrequency protection with F11 element and
underfrequency protection with F12 element
OO
OF
OF
Overfrequency protection both with F11 and F12 elements
UU
UF
UF
Underfrequency protection both with F11 and F12 elements
Off
OF
OF
To block frequency protection
(*) OF: Overfrequency characteristic
(**)UF: Underfrequency characteristic
[DFT1]:
This switch selects which frequency rate-of-change protection to apply. The
following protections can be selected by the [DFT1] settings.
[DFT1] setting
R
D
BOTH
Off
Protection selected
Frequency rise rate-of-change protection only
Frequency decay rate-of-change protection only
Both of frequency rise rate-of-change and decay rate-of-change
protections
To block frequency rate-of-change protection
[LOGIC1]: This switch is provided in the scheme logic selection circuit in Table 2.2.1 and
determines the trip command combination of frequency element output and
frequency rate-of-change element output. The following table shows the [Logic1]
setting and corresponding combinations.
Table 2.2.1 Frequency protection logic
[Logic1]
Setting
Scheme Logic
F1
L1
E
F2
1
E = F1 + F2 + DFR + DFD
DFR
DFD
&
F1
L2
Trip Command Logic ( +:OR, x : AND )
1
E
E = F1 x (DFR + DFD) + F2
1
E
E = F1 + F2 x (DFR + DFD)
1
E
E = (F1 + F2) x (DFR + DFD)
F2
DFR
1
DFD
F1
L3
DFR
DFD
L4
&
F2
1
F1
&
F2
&
DFR
DFD
1
 24 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
L5
F1
&
F2
&
1
E
E = F1 x DFR + F2 x DFD
DFR
DFD
The individual scheme logic for stages 2 to 4 are similar to that of stage 1 except that the device
names of the measuring elements, timers, scheme switches and binary input signals change and the
logic described above is applied to stages 2 to 4.
F21
F22
DF-R2
DF-D2
236
215
&
&
&
&
216
+
217
[FT2 ]
O
U
B
OO
UU
OFF
1
&
&
218
+
43
FRQ2 BLOCK
R
D
BOTH
OFF
F1
E
240
FRQ2 TRIP
F2
Scheme Logic
Selection : [Logic2]
&
[DFT2]
237
t
0
0.00 – 100.00S
1
&
FVBLK
t
0
0.00 – 100.00S
1
238
239
DFR
DFD
1
1
Figure 2.2.4 FRQ2 Frequency Protection Logic
F31
F32
DF-R3
DF-D3
241
219
&
&
&
&
220
+
221
[FT3 ]
O
U
B
OO
UU
OFF
1
&
&
222
[DFT3]
FRQ3 BLOCK
44
R
D
BOTH
OFF
F1
F2
Scheme Logic
Selection : [Logic3]
&
+
242
t
0
0.00 – 100.00S
1
&
FVBLK
t
0
0.00 – 100.00S
1
243
244
DFR
DFD
1
1
Figure 2.2.5 FRQ3 Frequency Protection Logic
 25 
E
245
FRQ3 TRIP
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
F41
F42
DF-R4
DF-D4
246
223
&
&
&
&
t
0
0.00 – 100.00S
247
t
0
0.00 – 100.00S
224
+
225
[FT4 ]
O
U
B
OO
UU
OFF
1
1
248
&
226
FVBLK
[DFT4]
+
FRQ4 BLOCK
45
R
D
BOTH
OFF
E
250
FRQ4 TRIP
F2
Scheme Logic
Selection : [Logic4]
&
&
F1
249
&
1
DFR
DFD
1
1
Figure 2.2.6 FRQ4 Frequency Protection Logic
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the frequency protection and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
Element
F1 (*)
F2
DF (**)
FVBLK(***)
TF1
TF2
FT
DFT
Logic
Range
45.00 – 55.00 Hz
( 54.00 – 66.00 Hz
45.00 – 55.00 Hz
( 54.00 – 66.00 Hz
0.1 – 9.9 Hz/s
40 –100 V
0.00 – 100.00 s
0.00 – 100.00 s
Off / O / U / B / OO / UU
Off / R / D / Both
L1 / L2 / L3 / L4 / L5
Step
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.1 Hz/s
1V
0.01 s
0.01 s
Default
51.00 Hz
61.00 Hz )
49.00 Hz
59.00 Hz )
0.5 Hz/s
40 V
1.00 s
1.00 s
B
Both
L1
Remarks
First frequency element setting
Second frequency element setting
Frequency rate-of-change (**)
Undervoltage block
Timer setting of first frequency element
Timer setting of second frequency element
Frequency protection selection
Frequency rate-of-change protection selection
Scheme logic selection
(*): Number 1 to 4 enter into  for stages 1 to 4 respectively.
(**): DF is a common setting element name for DFR and DFD.
(***): FVBLK is common to stage 1 to 4.
 26 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2.3
Trip and Alarm Signal Output
GRE130 provides various trip and alarm signal outputs such as three-phase and single-phase trip
and alarm for each protection. Figure 2.4.1 shows the trip and alarm signals grouped for each
protection.
GRE130 provides 8 auxiliary relays for binary outputs as described in Section 3.2.3.
After the trip signal has disappeared, following the clearance of the fault, the reset time of the
tripping output relay can be programmed. The setting is respective for each output relay.
When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or via a
binary input. This resetting resets all of the output relays collectively.
For the tripping output relay, a check must be made to ensure that the tripping circuit is open by
monitoring the status of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact prior to the tripping output relay
resetting, in order to prevent the tripping output relay from directly interrupting the circuit breaker
tripping coil current.
OV1 TRIP
OV2 TRIP
UV1 TRIP
UV2 TRIP
141
1
GEN_TRIP
ZPS1 TRIP
NPS1 TRIP
FRQ1 TRIP
FRQ2 TRIP
FRQ3 TRIP
FRQ4 TRIP
O V1 -A T R IP
O V2 -A T R IP
1
372
1
373
1
374
G EN _ TR I P-A
U V1 -A TR I P
U V2 -A TR I P
O V1 -B T R IP
O V2 -B T R IP
GEN _ T R IP-B
U V1 -B TR I P
U V2 -B TR I P
O V1 -C T R IP
O V2 -C T R IP
U V1 -C T R IP
G EN _ TR I P-C
U V2 -C T R IP
3 75
Z PS1 _ TR I P
Figure 2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs
 27 
G EN . T R IP -N
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
OV3 ALARM
1
UV3 ALARM
380
GEN_ALARM
ZPS2 ALARM
NPS2 ALARM
OV3-A ALARM
1
381
1
382
1
383
UV3-A ALARM
OV3-B ALARM
UV3-B ALARM
OV3-C ALARM
UV3-C ALARM
384
ZPS2 ALARM
GEN_ALARM-A
GEN_ALARM-B
GEN_ALARM-C
GEN_ALARM-N
Figure 2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs (cont’d)
 28 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3. Technical Description
3.1
Hardware Description
3.1.1
Outline of Hardware Modules
The case outline of GRE130 is shown in Appendix E.
As shown in Figure 3.1.1, the human machine interface (HMI) panel has a liquid crystal display
(LCD), light emitting diodes (LED), operation keys and a USB type-B connector on the front
panel.
The LCD consists of 16 columns by 8 rows (128x64dots) with a back-light and displays recording,
status and setting data.
There are a total of 14 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined as
follows:
Label
Color
Remarks
IN SERVICE
Green
Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test”
menu.
TRIP
Red
Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM
Yellow
Lit when relay alarm is detected.
Relay Fail
Red
Lit when a relay failure is detected.
CB CLOSED
Red/Green/
Lit when CB is closed.
Yellow
CB OPEN
Green
Lit when CB is open.
LOCAL
Yellow
Lit when Local Control is enabled
REMOTE
Yellow
Lit when Remote Control is enabled
(LED1)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED2)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED3)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED4)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED5)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
(LED6)
Red/Green/
Yellow
User-configurable
LED1 to LED6 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be programmed
for OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic,
settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latched operation. A configurable LED can be
programmed to indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, and the LED color can
be changed to one of three colors- (Red / Green / Yellow) , the individual status of which can be
viewed on the LCD screen as “Virtual LEDs.” For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10. For the
operation, see Section 4.2.1.
 29 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
The TRIP LED and an operated LED if latching operation is selected, must be reset by the user,
either by pressing the RESET key, by energising a binary input which has been programmed for
‘Remote Reset’ operation, or by a communications command. Other LEDs operate as long as a
signal is present. The RESET key is ineffective for these LEDs. Further, the TRIP LED is
controlled with the scheme switch [AOLED] whether it is lit or not by the output of an alarm
element such as OV4 ALARM, UV4 ALARM, etc..
The CB CLOSED and CB OPEN LEDs indicate CB condition. The CB CLOSED LED color can
be changed to one of three colors-(Red / Green / Yellow) .
The LOCAL / REMOTE LED indicates the CB control hierarchy. When the LOCAL LED is lit,
the CB can be controlled using the ○ and ｜ keys on the front panel. When the REMOTE LED
is lit, the CB can be controlled using a binary input signal or via relay communications. When
neither of these LEDs are lit , the CB control function is disabled.
The ▼ key starts the Digest screen (Metering, Virtual LED) view on the LCD. The ▼ key will
scroll the screen through “Virtual LED” → “Metering” →”Indication and back-light off” when
the LCD is in the Digest screen mode.
The ENTER key starts the Main menu indication on the LCD.
The END key clears the LCD indication and turns the LCD back-light off when the LCD is in
the “MAIN MENU”.
The operation keys are used to display the records, status and setting data on the LCD, to input
settings or to change settings.
The USB connector is a B-type connector. This connector is used for connection with a local
personal computer.
Liquid crystal
display
Light emitting
diodes (LED)
Light emitting
diodes (LED)
Control keys
Motor status
Operation keys
To a local PC
USB type B connector
Figure 3.1.1 Front Panel
 30 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.2
Input and Output Signals
3.2.1
AC Input Signals
Table 3.2.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for the GRE130 model and their respective
input terminal numbers. Their terminal numbers depend on their scheme switch [APPL] setting.
Table 3.2.1 AC Input Signals
: Scheme switch [APPL] setting
Model
Term. No.
of TB1
3.2.2
410
1PP
1PN
2PP
2PZ
3PN
3PV
3PP
1-2
Phase-tophase
voltage
Phase-toneutral
voltage
A-B phase
voltage
A-B phase
voltage
A phase
voltage
A phase
voltage
A-B phase
voltage
3-4
---
---
B-C phase
voltage
B-C phase
voltage
B phase
voltage
B phase
voltage
B-C phase
voltage
5-6
---
---
---
---
C phase
voltage
C phase
voltage
C-A phase
voltage
7-8
Ve
Ve
---
Ve
---
Ve
Ve
Binary Input Signals
The GRE130 provides 2 (Model 410) or 6 (Model 411) programmable binary input circuits. Each
binary input circuit is programmable, and provided with the function of Logic level inversion,
detection threshold voltage change and function selection.
Logic level inversion and detection threshold voltage change
The binary input circuit of the GRE130 is provided with a logic level inversion function, a pick-up
and drop-off delay timer function and a detection threshold voltage change as shown in Figure
3.2.1. Each input circuit has a binary switch BISNS which can be used to select either normal or
inverted operation. This allows the inputs to be driven either by normally open or normally closed
contacts. Where the driving contact meets the contact conditions then the BISNS can be set to
“Norm” (normal). If not, then “Inv” (inverted) should be selected. The pick-up and drop-off delay
times can be set 0.0 to 300.00s respectively.
The binary input detection nominal voltage is programmable by the user, and the setting range
varies depending on the rated DC power supply voltage. In the case that a 110V / 220Vdc rated
model is ordered, the input detection nominal voltage can be set to 48V, 110V or 220V for BI1 and
BI2, and to 110V or 220V for BI3-BI6. In the case of a 24 / 48Vdc model, the input detection
nominal voltage can be set to 12V, 24V or 48V for BI1 and BI2, and to 24V or 48V for BI3-BI6.
The binary input detection threshold voltage (i.e. minimum operating voltage) is normally set at
77V and 154V for supply voltages of 110V and 220V respectively. In the case of 24V and 48V
supplies, the normal thresholds are 16.8V and 33.6V respectively. Binary inputs can be configured
for operation in a Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) scheme by setting the [TCSPEN] switch to
“Enable”. For the case where TCS using 2 binary inputs is to be applied (refer to Section 3.3.3),
then the binary input detection threshold of BI1 and BI2 should be set to less than half of the rated
dc supply voltage.
 31 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
The logic level inversion function, pick-up and drop-off delay timer and detection voltage change
settings are as follow:
Element
Contents
Range
BI1SNS – BI6SNS
Binary switch
Norm/ Inv
Norm
BITHR1
BI1-2 nominal voltage
48 / 110 / 220
110
(12 / 24 / 48 )
(24)
110 / 220
110
(24 / 48)
(24)
Off
BITHR2
BI3-6 nominal voltage
Step
Default
TCSPEN
TCS enable
Off / On / Opt-On
BI1PUD – BI6PUD
Delayed pick-up timer
0.00 - 300.00s
0.01s
0.00
BI1DOD – BI6DOD
Delayed drop-off timer
0.00 - 300.00s
0.01s
0.00
Four alarm messages (Alarm1 to Alarm4) can be set. The user can define a text message within 16
characters for each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI2 or BI6 by
setting. Then when inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the
LCD.
GRE130
(+) ()
BI1
BI1PUD
BI1DOD
t
0
0
[BI1SNS]
t
BI1
BI1 command
"Norm"
1
"Inv"
BI2
BI2PUD
BI2DOD
t
0
0
t
BI2
BI3
"110V"
"48V"
BI6
BI2 command
"Norm"
[BITHR1]
"220V"
[BI2SNS]
1
+
"Inv"
+
+
BI6PUD
BI6DOD
t
0
0
t
[BI6SNS]
BI6 command
BI6
"Norm"
[BITHR2]
"220V"
"110V"
1
"Inv"
+
+
1
0V
Figure 3.2.1 Logic Level Inversion
Function selection
The input signals BI1 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are used for the functions listed in Table
3.2.2. Each input signal can be allocated for one or some of those functions by setting. For the
setting, refer to Section 4.2.6.8.
 32 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
The Table also shows the signal name corresponding to each function used in the scheme logic and
the LCD indication and driving contact condition required for each function.
[OV1BLK]
BI1 COMMAND
"ON"
OV1 BLOCK
[OV2BLK]
OV2 BLOCK
"ON"
[OV3BLK]
OV3 BLOCK
"ON"
[Alarm4]
Alarm 4
"ON"
Figure 3.2.2
Function Scheme Logic
The logic of BI2 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are the same as that of BI1 COMMAND as
shown in Figure 3.2.2.
Table 3.2.2 Function of Binary Input Signals
Functions
Signal Names (*1)
Driving Contact Condition
Overvoltage protection1 block
OV1 BLOCK / OV 1BLK
Closed to block
Overvoltage protection2 block
OV2 BLOCK / OV 2BLK
Closed to block
Overvoltage protection3 block
OV3 BLOCK / OV 3BLK
Closed to block
Undervoltage protection1 block
UV1 BLOCK / UV 1BLK
Closed to block
Undervoltage protection2 block
UV 2 BLOCK / UV 2BLK
Closed to block
Undervoltage protection3 block
UV 3 BLOCK / UV 3BLK
Closed to block
Zero phase sequence OV1 block
ZPS1 BLOCK / ZP1BLK
Closed to block
Zero phase sequence OV2 block
ZPS2 BLOCK / ZP2BLK
Closed to block
Negative phase sequenceOV1 block
NPS1 BLOCK / NP1BLK
Closed to block
Negative phase sequenceOV2 block
NPS2 BLOCK / NP2BLK
Closed to block
Frequency protection1 block
FRQ1 BLOCK / FRQ1BLK
Closed to block
Frequency protection2 block
FRQ2 BLOCK / FRQ2BLK
Closed to block
Frequency protection3 block
FRQ3 BLOCK / FRQ3BLK
Closed to block
Frequency protection4 block
FRQ4 BLOCK / FRQ4BLK
Closed to block
Trip circuit supervision
TC FAIL / TCFALM
Trip supply
State transition for cold load protection, trip
supervision and CB monitoring
CB CONT OPN / CBOPN
CB normally open contact
CB monitoring
CB CONT CLS / CBCLS
CB normally closed contact.
Indication remote reset
REMOTE RESET / RMTRST
Closed to reset TRIP LED indication
and latch of binary output relays
Synchronize clock
SYNC CLOCK / SYNCLK
Synchronize clock
 33 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Functions
Signal Names (*1)
Driving Contact Condition
Disturbance record store
STORE RECORD / STORCD
Closed to store the record
Alarm 1
Alarm 1 / Alarm1
Closed to display Alarm 1 text.
Alarm 2
Alarm 2 / Alarm2
Closed to display Alarm 2 text.
Alarm 3
Alarm 3 / Alarm3
Closed to display Alarm 3 text.
Alarm 4
Alarm 4 / Alarm4
Closed to display Alarm 4 text.
Remote Open
Remote OPEN / RMTOPN
CB normally open contact.
Remote Close
Remote CLOSE / RMTCLS
CB normally close contact.
Control Lock
Control Lock / CNTLCK
Closed to block
(*1) : Signal names are those used in the scheme logic / LCD indication.
The binary input signals can be programmed to switch between four settings groups.
Element
Contents
Range
BI1SGS – BI6SGS
Setting group selection
OFF / 1 / 2
Step
Default
OFF
Four alarm messages can be set. The user can define a text message using up to 22 characters for
each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI6 by setting. Then when
inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the LCD.
3.2.3
Binary Output Signals
The number of binary output signals and their output terminals are as shown in Appendix E. All
outputs, except the relay failure signal, can be configured.
GRE130 provides 5 auxiliary relays which is composed of one auxiliary relay FAIL for the relay
fail output and four programmable auxiliary relays BO1 to BO4.
The reset time of the tripping output relay following fault clearance can be programmed. The
setting is respective for each output relay.
The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix A can be assigned to output relays BO1 to BO4
individually or in arbitrary combinations. The output relays BO1 and BO2 connect to CB OPEN /
CLOSE for CB control. The CB close control switch ｜ is linked to BO1 and the CB open control
switch ○ is linked to BO2, when the control function is enabled.
Signals can be combined using either an AND circuit or OR circuit with 4 gates each as shown in
Figure 3.2.3. The output circuit can be configured according to the setting menu. Appendix G
shows the factory default settings.
Further, each BO has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off
“Ins”, for delayed drop-off “Dl”, for dwell operation “Dw” or for latching operation “Lat” by the
scheme switch [RESET]. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can be
set by TBO. When “Dw” is selected, the BO outputs for the TBO set time if the input signal does
not continue on the TBO set time. If the input signal continues, the BO output is continuous for the
time duration of the input signal.
When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary
input. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.
The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the power supply circuit is
 34 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
detected.
Signal List
&
Appendix A
Auxiliary relay
4 GATES
1
or
1
4 GATES
&
TBO
&
"Dw"
[RESET]
+
0
t
0.00 – 10.00s
"Dl"
&
S
F/F
"Lat"
R
Reset button
+
BI1_COMMAND

RMTRST
Figure 3.2.3 Configurable Output
Settings
The setting elements necessary for binary output relays and their setting ranges are as follows:
Element
[RESET]
Range
Ins Dl / Dw /Lat
Step
Default
See Appendix A
TBO
0.00 – 10.00s
0.01s
See Appendix A
 35 
Remarks
Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,
delayed, dwell or latched.
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.3
Automatic Supervision
3.3.1
Basic Concept of Supervision
Although the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it
continuously monitors the power system in order to detect a fault which may occur at any time,
and must operate for the fault without fail. Therefore, the automatic supervision function, which
checks the health of the protection system during normal operation, plays an important role. The
GRE130 implements an automatic supervision function, based on the following concepts:
 The supervising function should not affect the protection performance.
 Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.
 When a failure occurs, it is recorded as an Alarm record, the user should be easily able to
identify the location of the failure.

3.3.2
Under relay failure detection , CB open control is enabled, but CB close control is disabled.
Relay Monitoring
The relay is supervised by the following functions.
AC input imbalance monitoring
The AC current input is monitored to check that the following equation is satisfied and the health
of the AC input circuit is verified.
 Zero sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL]= “3PN” setting
|Va + Vb + Vc| / 3  6.35 (V)
 Negative sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL]≠ “1PN” or “1PP” setting
|Va + a2Vb + aVc| / 3  6.35 (V) where, a = Phase shift operator of 120, a2 = Phase shift
operator of 240
The zero sequence monitoring and negative sequence monitoring allow high sensitivity detection
of failures that have occurred in the AC input circuits.
The negative sequence voltage monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures in the
voltage input circuit, and it is effective for detection particularly when cables have been connected
with the incorrect phase sequence.
A/D accuracy checking
An analog reference voltage is applied to a prescribed channel in the analog-to-digital (A/D)
converter, and a check is made to ensure that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed
range, and that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.
Watchdog Timer
A hardware timer that is cleared periodically by the relay software is provided, to check that the
relay software is running normally.
Power supply Monitoring
The secondary voltage level is monitored, and a check is made to ensure that the DC voltage is
within a prescribed range.
 36 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.3.3
Trip Circuit Supervision
The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by either one or two binary inputs, as
described below.
Trip Circuit Supervision using 1 binary input
The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored using a binary input. Figure 3.3.1
shows a typical scheme. When the trip circuit is intact , a small current flows through the binary
input, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both the
breaker open and closed conditions. Then the logic signal output of the binary input circuit TC
FAIL is "1" under healthy conditions.
If the trip supply is lost or if a connection becomes open circuit, then the binary input resets and
TC FAIL becomes "0". Figure 3.3.2 shows the scheme logic. A trip circuit fail alarm TCSV is
output when the TC FAIL output is "0". If the trip circuit failure is detected, then “ALARM” LED
is lit and “Err: TC” is displayed in LCD message.
Monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON" and one BI
is selected for "TCFALM". When "OPT-N" is selected, monitoring is enabled only while the CB
is closed.
Circuit Breaker
GRE130
CB Trip Coil
Trip Output
+ve
Trip
Supply
Binary
Input
-ve Trip
Supply
CB Aux.
Contacts
Figure 3.3.1 Trip Circuit Supervision by 1 binary input
t
TC FAIL
1
1
(BI command)
0
0
t
&
0.4s
TCSV
0.4s
TC FAIL
(BI command)
CB status “closed”
&
1
"OPT-ON"
[TCSPEN]
+
"ON"
Figure 3.3.2 Supervision Scheme Logic
Trip Circuit Supervision using 2 binary inputs
The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored using two binary inputs. Figure 3.3.3
shows a typical scheme. When the trip circuit is intact a small current flows in the photo-couplers,
the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both the breaker open
and breaker closed conditions.
If the trip circuit supply is lost or if a connection becomes open circuit then the TCS issues a Trip
Circuit Fail alarm.
 37 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Monitoring is enabled by setting scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON" and the two
BIs selected for "TCFALM". When "OPT-ON" is selected, monitoring is enabled only while the
CB is closed. TCS using 2BIs should be applied using BI1 and BI2 for the BI inputs. For TCS
using 2BIs the BI nominal operating voltage ([BITHR1]) should be set to a value of approximately
half that of the trip supply voltage. If the trip supply voltage is 110V (or 24V) , [BITHR1] can be
set at "48" (or "12").
Circuit Breaker
GRE130
CB Aux.
Contacts
Trip Output
+ve
Trip
Supply
CB Trip Coil
-ve Trip
Supply
Resistor
Binary Input
(BI2)
Binary Input
(BI1)
Figure 3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision by 2 binary inputs
3.3.4
Circuit Breaker Monitoring
The relay provides the following circuit breaker monitoring functions.
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring
Circuit breaker state monitoring is provided for checking the health of the circuit breaker (CB). If
two binary inputs are programmed to the functions ‘CB_N/O_CONT’ and ‘CB_N/C_CONT’,
then the CB state monitoring function becomes active. Under normal circumstances these inputs
are in opposite states. Figure 3.3.4 shows the scheme logic. If both show the same state for a period
of five seconds, then a CB state alarm CBSV operates and “Err:CB” and “CB err” are displayed in
an LCD message and event record message respectively.
The monitoring can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [CBSMEN].
Normally open and normally closed contacts of the CB are connected to binary inputs BIm and
BIn respectively, and the functions of BIm and BIn are set to “CBOPN=ON” and “CBCLS=ON”
respectively. (Refer to Section 4.2.6.8.)
CB CONT_OPN
=1
1
t
0
&
1271
CBSV
5.0s
CB CONT_CLS
[CBSMEN]
+
"ON"
Figure 3.3.4 CB State Monitoring Scheme Logic
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring
Periodic maintenance of a CB is required in order to check the trip circuit, the operating
mechanism and the interrupting capability. Generally, maintenance is based on a time interval or a
number of fault current interruptions.
The following CB condition monitoring functions are provided to determine the time for
maintenance of a CB:
 38 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
 The number of trip operations are counted for maintenance of the trip circuit and CB
operating mechanism. The trip counter increments the number of tripping operations
performed. An alarm is issued and informs the user of the time for maintenance when the count
exceeds a user-defined setting TCALM.
The trip count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [TCAEN].
 Operating time monitoring is provided for CB mechanism maintenance. It checks the CB
operating time and the need for mechanism maintenance is advised if the CB operation is
slow. The operating time monitor records the time between issuing the tripping signal and the
phase currents falling to zero. An alarm is issued when the operating time for any phase
exceeds a user-defined setting OPTALM. The operating time is set in relation to the specified
interrupting time of the CB. The operating time alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the
scheme switch [OPTAEN].
The maintenance program should comply with the switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.
3.3.5
Failure Alarms
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED
indication, external alarm and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarizes the supervision items and
alarms.
The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen, which is displayed automatically
when a failure is detected or displayed by pressing ▼ key. The event record messages are shown
on the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.
The alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.
The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] to "OFF". The setting
is used to block unnecessary alarms during commissioning, test or maintenance.
When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software is not running normally, LCD display and
event recording of the failure may not function normally.
Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms
LED
"IN SERVICE"
LED
"ALARM"
LED
"Relay fail"
Err:V0,
Err:V2 (1)
On/Off (2)
On
(4)
V0 err, V2 err,
Relay fail or Relay fail-A (2)
(1)
Off
On
(4)
Relay fail
----
Off
On
(4)
----
Power supply monitoring
Err:DC
Off
(3)
Off
Relay fail-A
Trip circuit supervision
Err:TC
On
On
Off
TC err, Relay fail-A
CB state monitoring
CB condition monitoring
Trip count alarm
Err:CB
On
On
Off
CB err, Relay fail-A
ALM: TP
COUNT
On
On
Off
TP COUNT ALM,
Relay fail-A
Supervision Item
AC input imbalance
monitoring
A/D accuracy check
Memory monitoring
Watchdog Timer
LCD
Message
Alarm record Message
(1): Various messages are provided as expressed with "Err:---" in the table in Section 6.7.2.
(2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM" and off when set to "ALM &
BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.5). The message "Relay fail-A" is recorded when the scheme switch
[SVCNT] is set to "ALM".
(3): Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drop.
(4): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates.
The failure alarm and the relationship between the LCD message and the location of the failure is
shown in Table 6.7.1 in Section 6.7.2.
 39 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.3.6
Trip Blocking
When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked for as
long as the failure exists, and is restored when the failure is removed.
 A/D accuracy check
 Memory monitoring
 Watchdog Timer
When a fault is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring, the scheme switch [SVCNT]
setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is output, or if only an
alarm is output.
3.3.7
Setting
The setting element necessary for the automatic supervision and its setting range are shown in the
table below.
Element
[SVCNT]
Range
ALM&BLK/ALM
Step
[TCSPEN]
[CBSMEN]
Off/On
Off/On
Off
Off
Remarks
Automatic supervision and
AC input imbalance supervision
Trip circuit supervision
CB condition supervision
[TCAEN]
OFF/ON
OFF
Trip count alarm
TCALM
1 - 10000
10000
Trip count alarm threshold setting
1
 40 
Default
Off
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.4
Recording Function
The GRE130 is provided with the following recording functions:
Fault recording
Event recording
Disturbance recording
Counters
These records are displayed on the LCD screen of the relay front panel or on a local or remote PC.
3.4.1
Fault Recording
Fault recording is initiated by a tripping command from the GRE130 and the following items are
recorded for one fault:
Date and time
Trip mode
Operating phase
Power system quantities
User configurable initiation
Up to the 4 most-recent faults are stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 4 faults have
been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then stored.
Date and time occurrence
This is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated. The time resolution is 1 ms using
the relay internal clock.
Trip mode
This shows the protection scheme such as OV1, UV1 etc. that output the tripping command.
Operating phase
This is the phase to which a tripping command is output.
Power system quantities
The following power system quantities are recorded both pre-fault and post-fault.
3.4.2
-
Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltages (Va, Vb, Vc)
-
Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltages (Vab, Vbc, Vca)
-
Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence voltage which is measured directly in the form of
the system residual voltage (Ve)
-
Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltages (V1, V2, V0)
-
Frequency (f)
Event Recording
The events shown in Appendix B are recorded with a 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status
changes. For BI1 to BI6 commands, the user can select the items to be recorded and their status
change mode to initiate recording as below.
 41 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
One of the following four modes is selectable.
Modes
Setting
Not to record the event.
N
To record the event when the status changes to "operate".
O
To record the event when the status changes to "reset".
R
To record the event when the status changes both to "operate" and "reset".
B
For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.5. The default setting is "B"
Up to 200 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs after 200 records have been stored,
the oldest event record is overwritten. The LCD display only shows 100 records. All event records
(200 records) can be displayed on a PC. For how to download all of the event records onto a PC
refer to the RSM100 instruction manual.
3.4.3
Disturbance Recording
Disturbance recording is initiated when the overvoltage or undervoltage starter element operates
or a tripping command is initiated. Further, disturbance recording is initiated when a start
command is initiated. The user can configure four disturbance record triggers.
The records include a maximum of 8 analogue signals as shown in Table 3.4.1, 32 binary signals
and the dates and times at which recording started. Any binary signal shown in Appendix B can be
assigned using the binary signal setting of a disturbance record.
Table 3.4.1 Analog Signals for Disturbance Recording
Model
APPL setting
Model 410
1PP
1PN
2PP
2PV
3PN
3PZ
3PP
Vph
Vph
Vab
Vab
Va
Va
Vab
Vbc
Vbc
Vb
Vb
Vbc
Vc
Vc
Vca
Ve
Ve
Analog signals
Ve
Ve
Ve
The LCD display only shows the dates and times of the disturbance records stored. Details can be
displayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on a PC, see the RSM software
instruction manual.
The pre-fault recording time can be set between 0.1 and 4.9s and the post-fault recording time can
be set between 0.1 and 3.0s. But the combined duration for the pre-fault and post-fault recording
times is 5.0s or less. The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. The
approximate relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records stored
is shown in Table 3.4.2.
Note: If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.
Table 3.4.2 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored
Recording time
0.1s
0.5s
1.0s
1.5s
2.0s
2.5s
3.0s
50Hz
40
25
15
10
9
7
6
60Hz
40
20
10
9
7
6
5
 42 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Settings
The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
Time
0.1-5.0 s
0.1 s
2.0 s
Post-fault recording time
OV
10.0-200.0 V
0.1 V
120.0 V
Overvoltage detection
UV
5.0-130.0 V
0.1 V
60.0 V
Undervoltage detection
ZPS
1.0-130.0 V
0.1 V
20.0 V
Zero sequence overvoltage detection
NPS
1.0-130.0 V
0.1 V
20.0 V
Negative sequence overvoltage detection
Starting disturbance recording using a tripping command or the starter element listed above is
enabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches.
Element
Range
[Trip]
Step
Default
Remarks
OFF/ON
ON
Start by tripping command
[OV]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by OV operation
[UV]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by UV operation
[ZPS]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by ZPS operation
[NPS]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by NPS operation
 43 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.5
Metering Function
The GRE130 relay measures current and demand values of phase and phase-to-phase voltages,
residual voltage, symmetrical component voltages and frequency. The measurement data shown
below is displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on a local or remote PC.
The following quantities are measured and updated every second.
-
Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc)
-
Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (Vab, Vbc, Vca)
-
Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltage (V1, V2, V0)
-
Frequency (f)
Maximum and minimum of frequency (f: max, min)
- Frequency rate-of-change (df / dt)
The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary side
as determined by a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the VT ratio as well.
For the setting method, see "Setting the metering" in 4.2.6.6 and "Setting the parameter" in 4.2.6.7.
In the case of the maximum and minimum values display above, the measured quantity is averaged
over a rolling 15 minute time window, and the maximum and minimum recorded average values
are shown on the display screen.
The displayed quantities depend on [APPL] settings and relay model as shown in Table 3.5.1.
Input voltage greater than 0.06V at the secondary side are required for measurement.
Phase angles above are expressed taking the positive sequence voltage as a reference phase angle,
where leading phase angles are expressed as positive, (+).
Table 3.5.1
Displayed Quantity
Model
APPL
Model 410
1PP
1PN
2PP
2PV
3PN
Van

Vbn

Vcn

Vph

3PZ
3PP

Vab





Vbc








Vcb
V1





V2





V0



ｆ







f max







f min







df / dt







 44 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4. User Interface
4.1
Outline of User Interface
The user can access the relay from the front or rear panel.
Local communication with the relay is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting and Monitoring)
via a USB port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using MODBUS
communication via an RS485 port.
This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu tree
for the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).
4.1.1
Front Panel
As shown in Figure 3.1.1, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light
emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, and USB type B connector.
LCD
The LCD screen, provided with an 8-line, 16-character display and back-light, provides the user
with information such as records, statuses and settings. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but
pressing ▼ key will display the digest screen and pressing ENTER key will display the mainmenu screen.
These screens are turned off by pressing the END key when viewing the LCD display at the top
of the main-menu. If any display is left for approximately 5 minutes without operation, the
back-light will go off.
LED
There are 14 LED displays. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:
Label
Color
Remarks
IN SERVICE
Green
Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test” menu.
TRIP
Red
Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM
Yellow
Lit when an alarm command is issued or a relay alarm is detected.
Relay Fail
Red
Lit when a relay failure is detected.
CB CLOSED
R /G / Y
Lit when CB is closed.
CB OPEN
Green
Lit when CB is open.
Local
Yellow
Lit when Local Control is enabled
Remote
Yellow
Lit when Remote Control is enabled
(LED1)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
(LED2)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
(LED3)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
(LED4)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
(LED5)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
(LED6)
R/G/Y
user-configurable
 45 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
LED1-6 are configurable. For setting, see Section 4.2.6.10.
The TRIP LED illuminates when the relay operates and remains lit even after the trip command
releases . The TRIP LED can be extinguished by pressing the RESET key. Other LEDs are lit as
long as a signal is present and the RESET key is invalid while the signal is maintained.
Operation keys
,
▼
 ▼, ▲,
▲
The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as to
input or change set values. The function of each operation key is as follows:
: Used to move between lines displayed on a screen and to enter
numerical values and text strings.
 CANCEL :
Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen.
 END :
Used to end the entering operation, return to the upper screen or turn off the
display.
 ENTER :
Used to store or establish entries.
RESET key
Pressing the RESET key causes the Trip LED to turn off and latched output relays to be released.
Control keys
The control keys are used for CB control. When the LCD display cursor is not at the CB control
position-(CB close/open , Local / Remote), the Control keys will not function.
 ○ : Used for CB open operation. When the CB is in the open position, the ○ key
does not function.
② ｜ : Used for CB close operation. When the CB is in the closed position, the ｜
key does not function
③
L/R : Used for CB control hierarchy (local / remote) change.
CAUTION
The CB close control key ｜ is linked to BO1 and the CB open control key ○ is linked to BO2,
when the control function is enabled.
USB connector
The USB connector is a B-type connector for connection with a local personal computer.
 46 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.1.2
Communication Ports
The following three interfaces are provided as communication ports:

USB port

RS485 port

Optional Communication Unit port
USB port
This connector is a standard B-type connector for USB transmission and is mounted on the front
panel. By connecting a personal computer (PC) to this connector, setting operation and display
functions can be performed.
RS485 port
The RS485 port is used for MODBUS communication to connect between relays and to construct
a network communication system.
The RS485 port is provided on the rear of the relay as shown in Figure 4.1.1.
TB2
TB1
RS485 Port
Figure 4.1.1 Location of RS485 Port
 47 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2
Operation of the User Interface
The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with the
LCD display and operation keys.
Note: LCD screens depend on the relay model and the scheme switch setting. Therefore,
LCD screens described in this section are samples for a typical model.
4.2.1
LCD and LED Displays
Displays during normal operation
When the GRE130 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is off.
Press the ▼ key when the LCD is off to display the digest screens which are the "Indication",
"Metering", "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens in turn. "Latest
fault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens are displayed only when there is some
data. The following are the digest screens and can be displayed without entering the menu screens.
Indication
I
N D 1
[
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
]
I
N D 2
[
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
]
Metering
V a
n
*
*
.
*
*
V
V b
n
*
*
.
*
*
V
V c
n
*
*
.
*
*
V
V 0
*
*
.
*
*
V
V 1
*
*
.
*
*
V
V 2
*
*
.
*
*
V
f
*
*
.
*
*
H z
*
*
.
*
*
H z
f
/
t
/
s
To clear the latched indications (LEDs, LCD screen of Latest fault) of the latest fault indication,
press RESET key for 3 seconds or more.
For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.
 48 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Indication
This screen shows the status of elements assigned as a virtual LED.
I
N D 1
[
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
]
I
N D 2
[
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
]
Status of element,
Elements depend on user setting. 1: Operate, 0: Not operate (Reset)
Displays in tripping
Latest fault
P h
a
s
e
: Faulted phases.
A B C
: Tripping element
O V 1
If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED is lit
as well as other configurable LEDs if assigned to trigger by tripping.
Press the ▼ to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of the messages.
Press the RESET key for more than 3s to reset the LEDs; the Trip LED and configurable LEDs
(LED1 through LED6) are assigned to a latched signal if triggered by tripping.
To return from the menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:
 Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.
 Press the END key to turn off the LCD when the LCD is displaying the top menu.

Press the ▼ key to display the digest screens.
 49 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Displays in automatic supervision operation
Auto-supervision
E r
r
:
R O M ,
A /
D
If the automatic supervision function detects a failure when the LCD is off, the "Auto-supervision"
screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure, and the "ALARM" LED
lights.
Press the ▼ to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault"
screens.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs. However, if the failure continues, the "ALARM"
LED remains lit.
After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off
automatically.
If a failure is detected when any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayed
and the "ALARM" LED lights.
When any of the menu screens is displayed, the RESET key is available. To return to the digest
"Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:
 Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.
 Press the END key to turn off the LCD.

Press the ▼ key to display the digest screens.
Alarm Display
Alarm Display (ALM1 to ALM4)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
:
A L M 1
The four alarm screens can be provided, and their text messages are defined by the user. (For
setting, see Section 4.2.6.8) These alarms are raised by associated binary inputs.
Press the ▼ to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault"
screens.
To clear the Alarm Display, press RESET key. Clearing is available after displaying up to
ALM4.
 50 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.2
Relay Menu
Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy for the GRE130. The menu has some sub-menus,
"Record", "Status", "Set. (view)", "Set. (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu hierarchy,
see Appendix D.
Menu
Record
Fault
Event
Disturbance
Counter
Status
Metering
Binary I/O
Relay element
Time sync.
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast
Set. (view)
Version
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
Set. (change)
Password
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
Control
Password(Ctrl)
Local / Remote
CB close/open
Test
Password(test)
Switch
Binary O/P
Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu
 51 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Record
In the "Record" menu, the fault records, event records, disturbance records and counts such as trip
count can be accessed.
Status
The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay
measuring element status, signal source for time synchronisation (BI or RSM), adjusts clock and
LCD contrast.
Set. (view)
The "Set. (view)" menu displays the relay version, description, relay address and baud rate for
RSM, the current settings of record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary outputs
and configurable LEDs.
Set. (change)
The "Set. (change)" menu is used to change the settings for password, description, relay address
and baud rate for Modbus communication, record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable
binary outputs and configurable LEDs.
Since this is an important menu and is used to change settings related to relay tripping, it has
password security protection.
Control
The "Control" menu is used to operate the CB. When the cursor (>) is in the Local / Remote
position, the CB control hierarchy change over key L/R is enabled. When the cursor (>) is in the
CB close/open position, the CB control keys ○ and ｜ are enabled.
Since this is an important menu and is related to relay tripping, it has password security protection.
Test
The "Test" menu is used to set test switches and to forcibly operate binary output relays.
When the LCD is off, press the ENTER key to display the top "MAIN MENU" screen and then
proceed to the relay menus.
＞ R e
M A I
N
c
d
o
r
M E N U
S t
a t
u s
S e
t
.
(
v
i
S e
t
.
(
c
h a n g
C o
n t
o
l
T e
s
r
e
w )
e
)
t
To display the "MAIN MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the
turn off the LCD, then press the ENTER key.
Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.
 52 
▼ key to
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer.
The 8th line under some items is not displayed for all of the screens. " ",or " " or " " displayed
on the far right shows that lower or upper lines exist.
To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on the
window, use the ▼ and ▲ keys.
/
4
T r
S c
i
p
> T r
i
p
O f
f
/
h e
m e
s
w
_
1
O n
B I
O f
1
f
/
O n
O V
O f
1
f
/
O n
U V
O f
1
f
/
O n
Z P S
O f
1
F /
O n
N P S
O f
f
1
/
O n
F R Q
O f
f
1
/
O n
To return to the higher screen or move from the right side screen to the left side screen in Appendix
D press the END or CANCEL key.
The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully
because it may cancel entries made so far.
To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and then
move to the lower screen.
4.2.3
Displaying Records
The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records, disturbance records and
counts such as trip count.
4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records
To display fault records, do the following:
 Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.
 Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
/
1
R e
c
o
r
d
 53 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
＞ F a
u l
t
E v
e
n t
D i
s
t
C o
u n t
u r
e
b
a
n c
e
r
 Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.
/
2
F a
＞ V i
e
w
C l
e
a
u l
t
r
e
c
o
r
d
r
 Select "View record" to display the dates and times of the fault records stored in the relay from
the top in new-to-old sequence.
/
3
F a u l
t
＞ ♯ 1
0 1
/
J
a n /
2 0 1
0
0 :
0
0
:
.
0 1
0
0 1
/
J
a n /
2 0 1
0
0 :
0
0
:
.
0 0
0
0 1
/
J
a n /
2 0 1
0
0 :
0
0
:
.
0
0
♯ 2
0
♯ 3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
 Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the ▲ and ▼ keys and press
the ENTER key to display the details of the fault record.
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the ▲ and ▼
keys.
/
4
P r
e
V a n
V b n
V c
n
V a b
V b c
V c
a
F a u l
t
f
a u l
t
*
*
*
♯ 1
v
a l
u e
.
*
* k
V
*
*
.
* °
*
*
.
*
* k
*
*
*
.
* °
*
*
.
*
* k
*
*
*
.
* °
*
*
.
*
* k
*
*
*
.
* °
*
*
.
*
* k
*
*
*
.
* °
*
*
.
*
* k
 54 
V
V
V
V
V
s
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
*
*
*
.
* °
V p h
*
*
.
*
* k
V
V 0
*
*
.
*
* k
V
*
*
*
.
* °
*
*
.
*
* k
*
*
*
.
* °
*
*
.
*
* k
*
*
*
.
* °
*
*
.
*
* H z
*
*
.
*
* H z
V 1
V 2
f
f
/
t
V
V
/
s
Note: Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage (V1) as a reference phase
angle. When the V1 is not available, phase angles are not displayed.
Frequency above is displayed as "0Hz" when only residual voltage (zero sequence voltage) is input
to the relay
To clear all the fault records, do the following:
 Open the "Record" sub-menu.
 Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.
 Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l
e
a r
r
e
E N D = Y
c
o
r
d s
C A N C E L = N
 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the fault records stored in non-volatile memory.
If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not
displayed.
4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records
To display event records, do the following:
 Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.
 Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
 Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.
/
2
E v
＞ V i
e
w
C l
e
a
e
n t
r
e
c
o
r
d
r
 Select "View record" to display the events with date from the top in new-to-old sequence.
/
3
E v
e
n t
 55 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
A ｕ g
/
2
0 1
O V 1
･ A
t
r
i
2 4 /
A ｕ g
/
2
0 1
O V 1
･ A
t
r
i
2 4 /
A ｕ g
/
2
0 1
O V 1
･ A
t
r
i
2 4 /
A ｕ g
/
2
0 1
O V 1
･ A
t
r
i
2 4 /
A ｕ g
/
2
0 1
O V 1
･ A
t
r
i
2 4 /
A ｕ g
/
2
0 1
O V 1
･ A
t
r
i
The time is displayed by pressing the
Press the
▲
/
3
▼
2 4 /
0
1
P
0
0
O n
0
0
p
9
9
O N
0
9
p
8
O n
0
0
p
0
3
O n
0
0
p
0
2
O n
0
0
p
0
1
O n
key.
E v e
n t
1 3 :
2
2 :
4
5
.
2
O V 1
･
A
t
r
i
p
1 3 :
2
2 :
4
5
.
2
O V 1
･
A
t
r
i
p
1 3 :
2
2 :
4
5
.
1
O V 1
･
A
t
r
i
p
1 3 :
2
2 :
4
4
.
2
O V 1
･
A
t
r
i
p
1 3 :
2
2 :
4
4
.
1
O V 1
･
A
t
r
i
p
1 3 :
2
2 :
4
4
.
1
O V 1
･
A
t
r
i
p
1
1
O n
0
0
O N
1
1
O n
0
0
O N
1
1
O n
0
0
O n
key to return the screen with date.
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the ▲ and ▼
keys.
To clear all the event records, do the following:
 Open the "Record" sub-menu.
 Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.
 Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
 56 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
C l
e
a r
r
e
E N D = Y
c
o
r
d s
C A N C E L = N
 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the event records stored in non-volatile memory.
"Data lost" or "E.record CLR" and "F.record CLR" are displayed at the initial setting.
4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records
Details of disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays only
the recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in the
following sequence.
(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to the RSM100 manual.
 Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.
 Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
 Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.
/
2
D i
＞ V i
e
w
C l
e
a
s
t
u r
b a
n c
r
e
o
d
c
r
e
r
 Select "View record" to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in
new-to-old sequence.
/
3
♯ 1
D i
s
t
u r
0 1
/
J
0 0 :
♯ 2
0 1
0 0 :
♯ 3
0 1
0 0 :
a
n c
e
a n /
2 0
0
9
0 0
:
.
0
0
0
/
a n /
2 0
0
9
0 0
:
.
0
0
0
/
a n /
2 0
0
9
:
.
0
0
J
J
0 0
b
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the ▲ and ▼
keys.
To clear all the disturbance records, do the following:
 Open the "Record" sub-menu.
 Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.
 Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
 57 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
C l
e
a r
r
e
E N D = Y
c
o
r
d s
C A N C E L = N
 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.3.4 Displaying Counter
 Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.
 Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
 Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
/
2
C o
u n t
c
o
e
r
＞ V i
e
w
u n t
e
r
C l
e
a
r
T r
i
p s
C l
e
a
r
T r
i
p s
A
(*)
C l
e
a
r
T r
i
p s
B
(*)
C l
e
a
r
T r
i
p s
C
(*)
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Clear Trips" option is not available.
 Select "Display" to display the counts stored in the relay.
/
3
C o
u n t
e
r
*
*
*
*
*
*
T r
i
p s
T r
i
p s
A
*
*
*
*
*
*
(*)
T r
i
p s
B
*
*
*
*
*
*
(*)
T r
i
p s
C
*
*
*
*
*
*
(*)
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Trips" option is not available.
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the ▲ and ▼
keys.
To clear each count, do the following:
 Open the "Record" sub-menu.
 Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
 Select "Clear Trips" to display the following confirmation screen.
 58 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
C l
e
a r
T r
E N D = Y
i
p s
?
C A N C E L = N
 Select "Clear Trips A" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l
e
a r
T r
E N D = Y
i
p s
A ?
C A N C E L = N
 Select "Clear Trips B" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l
e
a r
T r
E N D = Y
i
p s
B ?
C A N C E L = N
 Select "Clear Trips C" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l
e
a r
E N D = Y
T r
i
p s
C ?
C A N C E L = N
 Press the END (= Y) key to clear the count stored in non-volatile memory.
 59 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.4
Status Display
From the sub-menu "Status", the following status condition can be displayed on the LCD:
Metering data of the protected line, apparatus, etc.
Status of binary inputs and outputs
Status of measuring elements output
Status of time synchronisation source
Status of clock adjustment
Status of LCD contrast
The data is updated every second.
4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data
To display metering data on the LCD, do the following:
 Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
/
1
S t
a
t
u s
t
e
r
i
n g
B i
n a
r
y
I
/
R e
l
y
e
T i
m e
C l
o
＞ M e
a
s
c
k
L C D
c
o
O
e
l
y
n c
.
a
d j
u s
t
a s
t
n t
r
m e
n t
.
.
 Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.
/
4
M e
V a n
V b n
V c
n
V a b
V b c
V c
a
V p h
t
e
r
i
n g
*
*
.
*
* k
*
*
*
.
* °
*
*
.
*
* k
*
*
*
.
* °
*
*
.
*
* k
*
*
*
.
* °
*
*
.
*
* k
*
*
*
.
* °
*
*
.
*
* k
*
*
*
.
* °
*
*
.
*
* k
*
*
*
.
* °
*
*
.
*
* k
 60 
V
APPL = 3PP
V
V
V
APPL = 3PN
V
V
V
APPL = 1PP
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
V 0
V 1
V 2
f
*
*
.
*
* k
V
*
*
*
.
* °
*
*
.
*
* k
*
*
*
.
* °
*
*
.
*
* k
*
*
*
.
* °
*
*
.
*
* H z
V
V
f
m a
x
*
*
.
*
* H z
f
m i
n
*
*
.
*
* H z
f
/
t
*
*
.
*
* H z
/
s
f
/
t
x
*
*
.
*
* H z
/
s
f
/
t
n
*
*
.
*
* H z
/
s
Note: Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage (V1) as a reference phase
angle. When the V1 is not available, phase angles are not displayed.
Frequency above is displayed as "0Hz" when only residual voltage (zero sequence voltage) is input
to the relay
4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs
To display the binary input and output status, do the following:
 Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
 Select "Binary I/O" to display the binary input and output status.
/
2
B i
n a r
I
P
[
0
0
0 0
y
0 0
I
/
O
]
O P
[
0
0
0 0
0
]
The display format is shown below.
[





Input (IP)
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
Output (OP)
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
FAIL
]
Line 1 shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI6 correspond to each binary input signal. For the
binary input signal, see Appendix B and G. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at
the photo-coupler output circuit. BI3 to BI6 are not available for model 410.
Line 2 shows the binary output status. All binary outputs BO1 to BO4 and FAIL are configurable.
The status of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input circuit of the
output relay driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".
FAIL is a normally closed contact for detection of a relay fail condition.
 61 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements
To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:
 Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
 Select 3 "Ry element" to display the status of the relay elements.
/
2
R y
e
l
e
m e
n t
A N
O V 1 -
3
[
0
0
0
]
B N
O V 1 -
3
[
0
0
0
]
C N
O V 1 -
3
[
0
0
0
]
A B
O V 1 -
3
[
0
0
0
]
B C
O V 1 -
3
[
0
0
0
]
C A
O V 1 -
3
[
0
0
0
]
[
0
0
0
]
O V 1 -
3
A N
U V 1 -
3 [
0 0 0
]
B N
U V 1 -
3 [
0 0 0
]
C N
U V 1 -
3 [
0 0 0
]
A B
U V 1 -
3 [
0 0 0
]
B C
U V 1 -
3 [
0 0 0
]
C A
U V 1 -
3 [
0 0 0
]
[
0
0
]
U V 1 -
3
0
V Z P S 1
-
2
[
0
0
]
V N P S 1
-
2
[
0
0
]
F R Q 1
4
[
0
0
-
0 0
]
The operation status of phase and residual overcurrent elements are shown as below.
[


AN OV1-3
OV1
OV2
OV3
A phase OV elements
BN OV1-3
OV1
OV2
OV3
B phase OV element
CN OV1-3
OV1
OV2
OV3
C phase OV element
AB OV1-3
OV1
OV2
OV3
A to B phase OV elements
BC OV1-3
OV1
OV2
OV3
B to C phase OV element
CA OV1-3
OV1
OV2
OV3
C to A phase OV element
OV1-3
OV1
OV2
OV3
OV elements
AN UV1-3
UV1
UV2
UV3
A phase UV element
BN UV1-3
UV1
UV2
UV3
B phase UV element
CN UV1-3
UV1
UV2
UV3
C phase UV element
AB UV1-3
UV1
UV2
UV3
A to B phase UV element
BC UV1-3
UV1
UV2
UV3
B to C phase UV element
CA UV1-3
UV1
UV2
UV3
C to A phase UV element
ZPS1-2
NPS1-2
FRQ1-4
ZPS1
NPS1
FRQ1
ZPS2
NPS2
FRQ2
FRQ3
Zero Phase Sequence element
Negative Phase Sequence element
Frequency element

FRQ4
 62 
]
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the element
is in operation.
4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronisation Source
The internal clock of the GRE130 can be synchronised with external clocks such as the binary
input signal clock or Modbus. To display on the LCD whether these clocks are active (=Act.) or
inactive (=Inact.) and with which clock the relay is synchronised , do the following:
 Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
 Select "Time sync." to display the status of time synchronisation sources.
/
2
T i
m e
> B I
M o
d b u s
s
y
n c
.
:
A C T .
:
I
n a c
t
.
The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronised with the marked source
clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.
Note: If the Binary input signal has not been detected for one hour or more since the last detection, the
status becomes "inactive".
For details of the setting time synchronisation, see Section 4.2.6.6.
4.2.4.5 Clock Adjustment
To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:
 Select "Status" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
 Select "Clock adjust." to display the setting screen.
/
2
> M i
H o
2 6 /
A u g
/
0 0 :
0 0
0 0
n u t
e
:
0
_
0
_
6
_
8
_
0
_
2
0
1 0
[
L ]
u r
D a y
2
M o
Y e
n t
h
a r
2 0 1
Lines 1 and 2 show the current date and time. The time can be adjusted only when the clock is
running locally. When [BI] or [M] is active, the adjustment is invalid.
 Enter a numerical value for each item and press the ENTER key. For details on how to enter
a numerical value, see 4.2.6.1.
 63 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
 Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to
the previous screen.
If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END is pressed, "**** Error ****" is
displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Return to the normal screen by pressing
the CANCEL key and adjust again.
4.2.4.6 LCD Contrast
To adjust the contrast of LCD screen, do the following:
 Select "Status" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
 Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.
/
2
L C D
C o
n t
r
a
s
t
■ ■ ■ ■
4.2.5
▼
▼
▲
▲
 Press the
or
key to adjust the contrast. The characters on the screen become thinner by
key.
key and thicker by pressing the
pressing the
Viewing the Settings
The sub-menu "Set. (view)" is used to view the settings made using the sub-menu "Set. (change)".
The following items are displayed:
Relay version
Description
Relay address and baud rate for Modbus communication or optional communication.
Record setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
Control setting
Frequency setting
Enter an item on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.
 64 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.5.1 Relay Version
To view the relay version, do the following.
 Press the "Set.(view)" on the main menu.
/
1
S e
t
.
(
v
i
e
w )
> V e
r
s
i
o
n
D e
s
c
r
i
p t
i
o
n
C o
m m s
R e
c
o
r
S t
a
t
u s
P r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
B i
n a
r
y
I
/
P
B i
n a
r
y
O /
P
r
o
d
L E D
C o
n t
l
 Press the "Version" on the "Set.(view)" menu.
/
2
V e
r
i
o
n
t
y
p e
w a r
e
.
> R e
l
a y
S o
f
t
s
 Select "Relay type" to display the relay type form and model number. (ex.;GRE130-411A-10-10)
G R E 1
-
3 0
-
4 1
1
A -
1
0
1 0
 Select "Software" to display the relay software type form and version.
G S 3 E M 1
-
0 3
 65 
-
A
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.5.2 Settings
The "Description","Comms","Record", "Status","Protection","Binary I/P","Binary O/P" ,"LED" ,
"Control" and "Frequency" screens display the current settings input using the "Set. (change)"
sub-menu.
4.2.6
Changing the Settings
The "Set. (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:
Password
Description
Relay address and baud rate for communication function
Recording setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
Control setting
Frequency setting
All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Set. (view)" sub-menu.
CAUTION
Modification of settings :
Care should be taken when modifying settings for "active group",
"scheme switch" and "protection element" in the "Protection" menu. Dependencies exist between
the settings in the various menus, with settings in one menu becoming active (or inactive)
depending on the selection made in another menu. Therefore, it is recommended that all necessary
settings changes be made while the circuit breaker tripping circuit is disconnected.
Alternatively, if it is necessary to make settings changes with the tripping circuit active, then it is
recommended to enter the new settings into a different settings group, and then change the "active
group" setting, thus ensuring that all new settings become valid simultaneously.
4.2.6.1 Setting Method
There are three setting methods as follows:
- To enter a selected item
- To enter a text string
- To enter numerical values
To enter a selected item
When the screen shown below is displayed, setting of the relay can be performed as follows.
The cursor can be moved to the upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the ▲ and ▼
keys. If a setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the ▲ and ▼ keys.
 66 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
/
1
S e
t
.
(
c
> P a
s
s
w o
r
d
D e
s
c
r
C o
m m s
R e
c
S t
a t
u s
P r
o
t
e
c
B i
n a
r
B i
n a
o
h a
n g
p t
i
o
n
t
i
o
n
y
I
/
P
r
y
O /
P
r
o
r
i
e
)
d
L E D
C o
n t
F r
e
q u e
l
n c
y
 Move the cursor to a setting item.
 Press the ENTER key.
To enter a text string
Texts strings are entered under "Plant name" or "Description" screen.
/
2
D e
> P l
D e
s
c
a n t
s
c
r
i
r
i
p t
n a
m e
p t
i
o
i
o
n
n
▼
▲
To select a character, use keys ▼ , ▲ ,
and
to move the blinking cursor down, up, left
and right. "" and "" on the final line indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A maximum
of 22 characters can be entered.
_
A B C D E F G H I
J K L M N O P
Q R S T U V W X Y Z a
b
c
d e
g h i
j
K l
m n o
p q
r
s
t
w x
y
z
0
1
2 3
4
5 6
7
8 9
(
[
@ _
{
}
*
/
+ -
< = > !
“
$ % & ‘
:
;
,
.
^ `
]
f
u v
)
 
 Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "" or "" and pressing the ENTER key.
 Move the blinking cursor to select a character.
 Press the ENTER key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the brackets.
 67 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
 Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered character, do either of the following:
 Discard the character by selecting "" and pressing the ENTER key and enter the new
character.
 Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the
beginning.
To enter numerical values
When the screen shown below is displayed, setting can be performed as follows:
The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. The
cursor can be moved to the upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys.
If a setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the ▲ and ▼ keys.
/
4
T i
T i
m e
m e
/
S t
1
a
r
t
_
e
s
> T i
m e
1
2
.
0 s
T i
m e
2
2
.
0 s
2 0
.
0 V
U V
6 0
.
0 V
Z P S
2 0
.
0 V
N P S
2 0
.
0 V
O V
1
r
▼▲
▲
 Press the
the
or
▼
 Move the cursor to a setting line.
or
key to set a desired value. The value can be raised or lowered by pressing
key. ,
 Press the ENTER key to enter the value.
 After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered numerical value, do the following.
 If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new
numerical value.
 If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the line that is to be corrected by
pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys and enter the new numerical value.
Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key, all
the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and screen returns to the upper
one.
To complete the setting
Enter after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER key, the new settings
are not yet used for operation, although they are stored in memory. To validate the new settings,
take the following steps.
 68 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
 Press the END key to return to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen
shown below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the
"Set. (change)" sub-menu.
C h a n g
e
s
E N T E R = Y
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
 When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to commence operation using the new
settings, or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen
will return to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries
that have been made so far and to return to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6.2
Password
For the sake of security of Setting changes and Testing, password protection can be set as follows:
 Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Setting change" screen.
 Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
 Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
S e
I
t
.
(
c
h a n g
n p u t
1 2
3 4
5
[
6
7 8
9
e
)
_
]
0 ＜
 For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".
S e
t
.
R e
t
y
p e
1 2
3
4 5
(
c
h a n g
[
6 7
8
9
_
e
)
]
0 ＜
 Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen
before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
 Select "Test" to set the password for the test.
Set the password in the same manner as that of "Setting" above.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
 69 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
screens.
If "Set. (change)" or "Test" is entered on the top "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen
"Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the
"Setting (change)" or "Test" sub-menu screens.
S e
t
(
c
P a
s
w o r
d
1 2
3 4
5
8
s
.
6 7
h a n g
[
9
e
)
_
]
0 ＜
Canceling or changing the password
To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The
"Set. (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password
Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the top "MAIN MENU" screen.
The screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRE130 is canceled. Set the password
again.
4.2.6.3 Plant Name
To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. The data will be attached to records.
 Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the " Set. (change)" screen.
 Select "Description" to display the "Description" screen.
/
2
D e
> P l
D e
s
c
a n t
s
c
r
i
r
i
p t
n a
m e
p t
i
o
i
o
n
n
 To enter the plant name, select "Plant name" on the "Description" screen.
 To enter special items, select "Description" on the "Description" screen.
 To enter the name for Alarm, select "Alarm" on the "Description" screen.
_
A B C D E F G H I
J K L M N O P
Q R S T U V W X Y Z a
b
c
d e
g h i
j
k l
m n o
p q
r
s
t
w x
y
z
0
1
2 3
4
5 6
7
8 9
(
[
@ _
{
}
*
/
+ -
< = > !
“
$ % & ‘
:
;
,
.
^ `
]
 70 
f
u v
)
 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
 Enter the text string.
4.2.6.4 Communication
If the relay is linked with RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) or IEC60870-5-103
communication or Ethernet LAN, the relay address must be set. Do this as follows:
 Select "Set.(change)" on the main "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set.(change)" screen.
 Select "Comms" to display the "Comms" screen.
/
2
C o
m m s
＞ A d d r
.
S w i
c
t
h
 Select "Addr." on the "Comms" screen to enter the relay address number.
/
3
A d
C o
d r
m m s
.
> A d d r
_
.
1
 Enter the relay address number on RSM or Modbus and press the ENTER key.
CAUTION
Do not overlap the relay address number.
Setting for MODBUS communication
 Select "Switch" on the "Comms" screen to select the protocol and transmission speed (baud
rate), etc., of the Modbus and other communication.
/
3
S w i
t
c
h
R S 4 8 5
> R S 4 8
9
.
6 /
_
5
1
0
9 .
2
 Select the number and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording function
To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:
 Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)"
screen.
 Select "Record" to display the "Record " screen.
 71 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
/
2
R e
c
o
r
d
u r
b
a
> E v
e
n t
D i
s
t
C o
u n t
e
n c
e
r
Setting the event recording
 Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.
/
3
E v
e
n t
c
o
m m .
_
1
c
o
3
N /
O /
R /
B
B I
2
c
m m .
N /
O /
R /
B
B I
3
c
m m .
N /
O /
R /
B
B I
4
c
m m .
N /
O /
R /
B
B I
5
c
m m .
N /
O /
R /
B
B I
6
c
m m .
N /
O /
R /
B I
1
> B I
o
o
o
o
o
m m .
3
3
3
3
3
B
 Enter 0(=None) or 1(=Operate) or 2(=Reset) or 3(=Both) for BI command trigger setting and
press the ENTER key.
Setting the disturbance recording
 Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.
/
3
D i
s
t
b a
n c
> T i
m e
/
S t
a
r
t
e
S c
h e
m e
s
w
B i
n a
r
s
i
g
.
y
u r
 72 
r
e
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
 Select "Time/starter" to display the "Time/starter" screen.
/
4
T i
T i
m e
m e
/
S t
1
a
r
t
_
> T i
m e
1
T i
m e
2
2
e
s
.
0 s
2
.
0 s
2 0
.
0 V
U V
6 0
.
0 V
Z P S
2 0
.
0 V
N P S
2 0
.
0 V
O V
1
r
 Enter the recording time and starter element settings.
To set each starter to either used or not used, do the following:
 Select "Scheme sw" on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/
4
T r
S c
i
p
> T r
i
p
O f
f
/
h e
m e
s
w
_
1
O n
B I
O f
1
f
/
O n
O V
O f
1
f
/
O n
U V
O f
1
f
/
O n
Z P S
O f
f
1
/
O n
N P S
O f
f
1
/
O n
F R Q
O f
f
1
/
O n
D F R Q
O f
f
/
1
O n
 Enter 1 to use as a starter. If not to be used as a starter, enter 0.
To set each signal number to record binary signals, do the following:
 Select "Binary sig." on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Binary sig." screen.
/
4
S I
B i
n a r
y
s
i
G 1
g
_
> S I
G 1
5
1
S I
G 2
5
1
S I
G 3
5
1
S I
G 4
5
1
 73 
.
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
S I
G 3
1
5
1
S I
G 3
2
5
1
 Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix A.
Setting the counter
 Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
/
3
C o
u n t
e
r
> S c
h e
m e
s
w
A l
a r
m
e
t
s
To set each counter to either used or not used , do the following:
 Select "Scheme sw" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/
4
S c
h e
m e
s
w
T C S P E N
_
> T C S P E N
1
O f
f
/
O n /
O p t
-
C B S M E N
O f
f
/
1
O n
T C A E N
O f
f
/
O n
1
O n
 Enter 1 to use as a counter. If not to be used as a counter, enter 0.
To set the threshold setting, do the following:
 Select "Alarm set" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Alarm set" screen.
/
4
A l
a
r
m
s
e
t
T C A L M
> T C A L M
_
1
0 0
 Enter the threshold settings.
 74 
0
0
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.6.6 Status
To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following:
Select "Status" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.
/
2
> M e
T i
S t
a
t
u s
t
r
i
n g
s
y
e
m e
n c
.
Setting the metering
 Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.
/
3
D i
s
M e
t
e
p l
a
y
_
a y
1
> D i
s
p l
P r
i
/
S e
r
i
n g
c
 Enter 0 or 1 or 2 for Display.
Enter 0(=Pri.) to display the primary side voltage in kilo-volts(kV).
Enter 1(=Sec.) to display the secondary side voltage.
Setting the time synchronisation
The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the binary input signal or Modbus.
This is selected by setting as follows.
 Select "Time sync" to display the "Time sync" screen.
/
3
T i
T i
m e
> T i
O f
s
y
y
n c
.
s
y
n c
.
B I
/
M o
d b u s
s
m e
f
m e
/
n c
.
_
1
 Enter 0, 1, 2 or 3 and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0(=off) not to be synchronised with any external signals.
Enter 1(=BI) to be synchronised with the binary input signal.
Enter 2(=Modbus) to be synchronised with the Modbus.
Note: When selecting BI or Modbus, check that they are active on the "Status" screen in the "Status"
sub-menu.
If BI is selected, the BI command trigger setting should be “None” because the event records
will rapidly become full . (See Section 4.2.6.5.)
If it set to an inactive BI or Modbus, the calendar clock runs locally.
 75 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.6.7 Protection
The GRE130 can have 2 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in the
operation of the power system, one setting group is assigned active. To set the protection, do the
following:
 Select "Protection" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.
/
2
P r
o
t
> C h a n g
c
t
i
o
n
e
a
c
t
.
g
C h a n g
e
s
e
t
C o
g
p .
p y
e
p .
Changing the active group
 Select "Change act. gp." to display the "Change act. gp." screen.
/
3
C h a
g
p .
t
i
v
e
> A c
t
i
v
A c
n g
g
e
e
a
c
t
p .
_
g
1
p .
.
 Enter the group number and press the ENTER key.
Changing the settings
Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product is shipped. For the
default values, see Appendix G. To change the settings, do the following:
 Select "Change set." to display the "Act gp.= *" screen.
/
3
> C o
A c
t
m m o
g
p .
n
G r
o
u p 1
G r
o
u p 2
 76 
= 1
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Changing the Common settings
 Select "Common" to set the voltage input state and input imbalance monitoring and press the
ENTER key.
/
4
C o
m m o
n
A P P L
_
> A P P L
1
1
P P /
1
P N /
3
P N /
3 P V /
2 P P /
2
P Z
3 P P
A O L E D
O f
f
/
O n
<APPL>
 Enter 0(=1PP), 1(=1PN), 3(=2PP), 4(=2PZ), 5(=3PN), 6(=3PV) or 7(=3PP) to set the voltage
input state and press the ENTER key.
AOLED
This switch is used to control the “TRIP” LED light when an alarm element is output.
 Enter 1 (=On) to illuminate the “TRIP” LED when an alarm element outputs, and press the
ENTER key. If not, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
 77 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Changing the Group settings
 Select the "Group" on the "Act gp.= *" screen to change the settings and press the ENTER
key.
/
4
G r
o
u p ＊
> P a
r
a
m e
T r
i
p
t
e
r
Setting the parameter
Enter the line name, the VT ratio and the fault locator as follows:
 Select "Parameter" on the "Group " screen to display the "Parameter" screen.
/
5
P a
> L i
n e
V T
r
r
a m e
n a
a t
i
t
e
r
m e
o
 Select "Line name" to display the "Line name" screen.
 Enter the line name as a text string and press the EN D key.
 Select "VT ratio" to display the "VT ratio" screen.
/
6
V T
r
a
t
i
o
P V T
_
> P V T
1
0
0
R V T
1
0
0
 Enter the VT ratio and press the ENTER key.
Setting the trip function
To set the scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.
 Select "Trip" on the "Group " screen to display the "Trip" screen.
/
5
T r
i
> S c
h e
m e
o
.
P r
t
p
e
s
w
l
e
 78 
m e
n t
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting the scheme switch
 Select "Scheme sw" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/
6
S c
> A p p l
h e
m e
i
c
a
t
i
s
w
o
n
O V
p
r
o
t
.
U V
p
r
o
t
.
Z P S
p r
o
t
N P S
p r
o
t
.
F R Q
p r
o
t
.
.
Setting the application
To set the application setting, do the following.
 Select "Application" on the " Scheme sw" screen to display the "Application" screen.
/
7
A p
p l
i
c
a t
i
o
S V C N T
_
> S V C N T
1
A L M & B L K /
n
A L M
SVCNT
Set the alarming and tripping block, or only alarming when a failure is detected by the automatic
supervision and AC input imbalance supervision.
 Enter 0(=ALM&BLK, alarming and tripping block) or 1(=ALM, only alarming) and press the
ENTER key.
Setting the OV protection
The settings for the OV protection are as follows:
 Select "OV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "OV" screen.
/
7
O V
p r
o
t
.
O V 1 E N
_
> O V 1 E N
1
O f
f
/
D T /
I
M D T /
O V 2 E N
O f
f
/
1
D T /
I
M D T /
O V 3 E N
O f
f
/
C
C
1
O n
OV1EN, <OV2EN>
To set the OV1 and OV2 delay type, do the following.
 Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If
disabling the OV1 or OV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
 79 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
OV3EN
 Enter 1 (=On) to enable the OV3, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OV3, enter 0
(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
 After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g
e
s
E N T E R = Y
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
 Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the UV protection
The settings for the UV protection are as follows:
 Select "UV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "UV" screen.
/
7
U V
p r
o
t
.
U V 1 E N
_
> U V 1 E N
1
O f
f
/
D T /
I
M D T /
U V 2 E N
O f
f
/
1
D T /
I
M D T /
U V 3 E N
O f
f
/
f
/
C
1
O n
V B L K E N
O f
C
1
O n
UV1EN, <UV2EN>
To set the UV1 and UV2 delay type, do the following.
 Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If
disabling the UV1 or UV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
UV3EN
 Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV3, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV3, enter 0
(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
 After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g
e
s
E N T E R = Y
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
 80 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
 Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
VBLKEN
 Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV blocking and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV
blocking, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the ZPS Protection
The settings for the ZPS protection are as follows:
 Select "ZPS" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "ZPS" screen.
/
7
Z P S
p r
o
t
Z P S 1 E N
_
> Z P S 1
1
O f
f
/
E N
D T /
Z P S 2
E N
O f
D T /
f
/
I
D M T /
C
1
I
D M T /
C
ZPS1EN, <ZPS2EN>
To set the ZPS1 and ZPS2 time delayed type, do the following.
 Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If
disabling the ZPS1 or ZPS2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
 After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g
e
s
E N T E R = Y
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
 Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the NPS protection
The settings for the NPS protection are as follows:
 Select "NPS" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "NPS" screen.
/
7
N P S
p r
o
t
N P S 1 E N
_
> N P S 1
1
O f
f
/
E N
D T /
N P S 2
E N
O f
D T /
f
/
I
D M T /
C
1
I
D M T /
 81 
C
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
NPS1EN, <NPS2EN>
To set the NPS1 and NPS2 time delayed type, do the following.
 Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If
disabling the NPS1 or NPS2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
 After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g
e
s
E N T E R = Y
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
 Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the FRQ protection
The settings for the FRQ (over/under frequency) protection are as follows:
 Select "FRQ" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.
/
7
F R Q
p r
o
t
F T 1
_
> F T 1
1
O f
f
/
O /
U /
B /
O O /
D F T 1
O f
f
/
L o
g i
L 1
/
1
R /
c
1
L 2
/
D /
B o
L 3
/
t
L 4
F T 2
O f
f
/
O f
f
L o
g i
L 1
/
O /
U /
B /
/
R /
c
2
L 2
/
U U
D /
B o
L 3
/
t
L 4
h
/
L 5
0
/
O f
f
L o
g i
L 1
/
O /
U /
B /
O O /
/
U U
0
R /
c
3
L 2
/
D /
B o
L 3
/
t
L 4
F T 4
f
L 5
0
D F T 3
O f
/
O O /
F T 3
f
h
0
D F T 2
O f
U U
h
/
L 5
0
/
O /
U /
B /
O O /
D F T 4
O f
f
/
L o
g i
L 1
/
U U
0
R /
c
4
L 2
/
D /
B o
L 3
/
 82 
t
L 4
h
/
L 5
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
<FT1>,<FT2>,<FT3>,<FT4>
FT1, FT2, FT3 and FT4 select the frequency protection.
 Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 or 5 and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0 (=Off) not to use the frequency protection.
Enter 1 (=O) to use the F11 element for overfrequency protection. The F12 element is not used.
Enter 2 (=U) to use the F11 element for underfrequency protection. The F12 element is not
used
Enter 3 (=B) to use the F11 element for overfrequency protection and the F12 element for
underfrequency protection.
Enter 4 (=OO) to use the F11 and F12 elements for overfrequency protection.
Enter 5 (=UU) to use the F11 and F12 elements for underfrequency protection.
<DFT1>, <DFT2>, <DFT3>, <DFT4>
DFT1, DFT2, DFT3 and DFT4 select the frequency rate-of-change protection.
 Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0 (= Off) not to use the frequency rise rate nor frequency decay rate protection.
Enter 1 (= R) to use only the frequency rise rate protection.
Enter 2 (= D) to use only the frequency decay rate protection.
Enter 3 (= Both) to use both the frequency rise rate and frequency decay rate protections.
<Logic 1>, <Logic 2>, <Logic3>, <Logic 4>
Logic 1, Logic 2, Logic 3 and Logic 4 select the tripping combination of the frequency protection
and the frequency rate-of-change protection.
 Enter 0 (=L1) or 1 (=L2) or 2 (=L3) or 3 (=L4) or 4 (=L5) and press the ENTER key.
Refer to Table 2.2.1 for setting.
Setting the protection elements
To set the protection elements, do the following.
 Select "Prot. element" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Prot. element" screen.
/
6
P r
o
t
.
e
> O V
p
r
o
t
.
U V
p
r
o
t
.
Z P S
p r
o
t
N P S
p r
o
t
F R Q
p r
o
t
l
 83 
e
m e
n t
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting the OV elements
 Select "OV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "OV" screen.
/
7
O V
p r
o
t
.
O V 1
_
> O V 1
1 0 .
T O V 1
T O V 1
M
T O V 1
R
V
0 V
1
.
0 0
1
.
0 0
0
.
O V 1 D P R
0
OV1 Threshold setting.
S
OV1 Definite time delay.
OV1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
s
OV1 Definite time reset delay.
9 5
%
OV1 DO/PU ratio
O V 2
1 0
.
0
V
OV2 Threshold setting.
T O V 2
1
.
0 0
S
OV2 Definite time delay.
1
.
0 0
0
.
T O V 2
M
T O V 2
R
O V 2 D P R
0
OV2 Inverse time multiplier setting.
s
OV2 Definite time reset delay.
9 5
%
OV2 DO/PU ratio
O V 3
1 0
.
0
V
OV3 Threshold setting.
T O V 3
1
.
0 0
S
OV3 Definite time delay.
O V 1 -
k
1 .
0 0
OV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
O V 1 -
a
1
.
0 0
ditto
O V 1 -
C
0
.
0 0
ditto
O V 2 -
k
1 .
0 0
OV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
O V 2 -
a
1
.
0 0
ditto
O V 2 -
c
0
.
0 0
ditto
 Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
 After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g
e
s
E N T E R = Y
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
 Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the UV elements
 Select "UV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "UV" screen.
 84 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
/
7
U V
p r
o
U V 1
t
.
_
> U V 1
T U V 1
V
5
.
0
V
UV1 Threshold setting.
0
.
0 5
S
UV1 Definite time delay.
.
0 5
T U V 1
M
0
T U V 1
R
1 0
UV1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
0 .
0 s
UV1 Definite time reset delay.
U V 2
4
0
.
0
V
UV2 Threshold setting.
T U V 2
0
.
0 5
S
UV2 Definite time delay.
.
0 5
T U V 2
M
0
T U V 2
R
1 0
UV2 Inverse time multiplier setting.
0 .
0 s
UV2 Definite time reset delay.
U V 3
1
0
.
0
V
UV3 Threshold setting.
T U V 3
1
.
0 0
S
UV3 Definite time delay.
V B L K
1
0
.
V
UV Blocking threshold
0
U V 1 -
k
1
.
0 0
UV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
U V 1 -
a
1
.
0 0
ditto
U V 1 -
c
0
.
0 0
ditto
U V 2 -
k
1
.
0 0
UV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
U V 2 -
a
1
.
0 0
ditto
U V 2 -
c
0
.
0 0
ditto
 Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
 After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g
e
s
E N T E R = Y
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
 Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the ZPS elements
 Select "ZPS" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "ZPS" screen.
/
7
Z P S
Z P S
p r
1
o
t
_
> Z P S 1
V
5 .
T Z
P S 1
T Z
P S 1
M
T Z
P S 1
R
0
V
ZPS1 Threshold setting.
0
.
0 5 S
ZPS 1 Definite time delay.
0
.
0
5
ZPS 1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
0
0 .
0
s
ZPS 1 Definite time reset delay.
Z P S 2
4
0 .
0
V
ZPS 2 Threshold setting.
T Z
0
.
P S 2
1
0 5 S
ZPS 2 Definite time delay.
 85 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
T Z
P S 2
M
T Z
P S 2
R
1
0
.
0
5
0
0 .
0
0
ZPS 2 Inverse time multiplier setting.
s
ZPS 2 Definite time reset delay.
Z P S 1
-
k
1
.
0
Z P S 1
-
a
1
.
0 0
ditto
Z P S 1
-
c
0
.
0 0
ditto
Z P S 2
-
k
1
.
0
ZPS 2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
Z P S 2
-
a
1
.
0 0
ditto
Z P S 2
-
c
0
.
0 0
ditto
ZPS 1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
 Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
 After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g
e
s
E N T E R = Y
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
 Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the NPS protection elements
 Select "NPS" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "NPS" screen.
/
7
N P S
N P S
p r
1
o
t
_
> N P S 1
V
5 .
0
V
NPS1 Threshold setting.
0
.
0
5
S
NPS 1 Definite time delay.
0
.
0
5
0
0 .
0
N P S 2
4
0 .
0 V
NPS 2 Threshold setting.
T N P S 2
0
.
0
5
NPS 2 Definite time delay.
0
.
0
5
0
0 .
0
T N P S 1
T N P S 1
M
T N P S 1
R
1
NPS 1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
s
S
NPS 1 Definite time reset delay.
T N P S 2
M
T N P S 2
R
N P S 1
-
k
1
.
0 0
NPS 1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
N P S 1
-
a
1
.
0
0
ditto
N P S 1
-
c
0
.
0
0
ditto
N P S 2
-
k
1
.
0 0
NPS 2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
N P S 2
-
a
1
.
0
0
ditto
N P S 2
-
c
0
.
0
0
ditto
1
NPS 2 Inverse time multiplier setting.
s
NPS 2 Definite time reset delay.
 Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
 After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
 86 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
C h a n g
e
s
E N T E R = Y
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
 Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the FRQ elements
 Select "FRQ" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.
/
7
F R Q
p r
F 1 1
> F 1
1
0
2
D F 1
0
F 3
0
D F 3
.
5 H z
2
D F 4
0
s
DF2 for FRQ2 of DFRQ2 Threshold setting.
F31 for FRQ3 threshold setting.
F31 Definite time delay.
F32 for FRQ3 Threshold setting.
/
F32 Definite time delay.
s
DF3 for FRQ3 of DFRQ3 Threshold setting.
0 H z
F41 for FRQ4 threshold setting.
0 5 S
5 .
T F 4 2
/
F22 Definite time delay.
0 5 S
5 .
.
F22 for FRQ2 Threshold setting.
0 H z
.
0
F21 Definite time delay.
0 H z
0
1
F21 for FRQ2 threshold setting.
0 5 S
5 .
0
DF1 for FRQ1 of DFRQ1 Threshold setting.
0 5 S
5 .
T F 4 1
F 4
5 H z
2
s
0 H z
.
.
/
F12 Definite time delay.
0 5 S
.
0
F12 for FRQ1 Threshold setting.
0 H z
0
1
F11 Definite time delay.
0 5 S
5 .
T F 3 2
F 4
5 H z
2
T F 3 1
F 3
.
.
F11 for FRQ1 threshold setting.
0 H z
.
0
H z
0 5 S
5 .
T F 2 2
0
0
1
D F 2
.
5 .
T F 2 1
F 2
H z
5 .
T F 1 2
F 2
t
_
T F 1 1
F 1
o
F41 Definite time delay.
0 H z
0
.
.
5 H z
F42 for FRQ4 Threshold setting.
0 5 S
/
F42 Definite time delay.
s
DF4 for FRQ4 of DFRQ4 Threshold setting.
 Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
 After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g
e
s
E N T E R = Y
e
t
t
i
n g
s
?
C A N C E L = N
 87 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
 Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting group copy
To copy the settings from one settings group and overwrite them to another group, do the
following:
 Select "Copy gp." on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy A to B" screen.
/
3
C ｏ ｐ ｙ
A
t
o
B
> A
_
B
_
 Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.
 Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.8 Binary Input
The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic.
Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requirements described in Table 3.2.2.
 Select "Binary I/P" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary I/P" screen.
/
2
B i
> B I
n a r
S t
a t
y
I
/
P
u s
B I
1
B I
2
B I
3
B I
4
B I
5
B I
6
A l
a r
m 1
T e
x
t
A l
a r
m 2
T e
x
t
A l
a r
m 3
T e
x
t
A l
a r
m 4
T e
x
t
Setting Binary Input Status
The binary input nominal operating voltage can be selected in GRE130. Control voltages of 24V,
48V, 110V and 220V are supported.
BI1 and BI2 can be set to one of three nominal voltages - 48 / 110 / 220V ( or 12 / 24 / 48V)
BI3 to BI6 can be set to one of two nominal voltages – 110 / 220V (or 24 / 48V)
Note: The nominal voltage 48V (or 12V) of BI1 and BI2 is used for Trip Circuit Supervision using 2
Binary inputs. See section 3.3.3.
The threshold voltage options of 48-220V and 12-48V correspond to the dc auxiliary voltage
 88 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
supply rating of the relay models.
To set the binary inputs threshold voltage, do the following:
 Select "BI Status" on the "Binary I/P" screen to display the "BI Status" screen.
/
3
B I
B I
a
t
u s
T H R 1
> B I
4
S t
8
T H R 1
/
1
1
0 /
B I
T H R 2
1
0 /
1
2
1
2
2 0
0
2 0
BITHR1
To set the threshold voltage for Binary Inputs 1 and 2 , do the following.
 Enter 0(=48V) or 1(=110V) or 2(=220V) and press the ENTER key.
BITHR2
To set the threshold voltage for Binary Inputs 3 to 6 , do the following.
 Enter 0(=110V) or 1(=220V) and press the ENTER key.
Selection of Binary Input
 Select the input number (BI number) on the "Binary I/P" screen.
After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI" screen.
/
3
B I
1
> T i
m e
r
s
F u n c
t
i
o
n s
Setting Alarm  Text
If the BI selected is used for an alarm, an alarm message can be set.
 Select the Alarm text and press the ENTER key to display the text input screen.
_
A B C D E F G H I
J K L M N O P
Q R S T U V W X Y Z a
b
c
d e
g h i
j
k l
m n o
p q
r
s
t
w x
y
z
0
1
2 3
4
5 6
7
8 9
(
[
@ _
{
}
*
/
+ -
< = > !
“
$ % & ‘
:
;
,
.
^ `
]
f
u v
)
 
 Enter the characters (up to 22 characters) according to the text setting method.
 89 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI" screen.
Setting timers
 Select "Timers" on the "BI" screen to display the "Timers" screen.
/
4
B I
T i
m e
r
s
1 P U D
_
s
> B I
1 P U D
0 .
0 0 s
Pick-up delay setting
B I
1 D O D
0
0 0
Drop-off delay setting
.
s
 Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
 After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.
Setting Functions
 Select "Functions" on the "BI" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/
4
B I
F u n c
t
i
o
1 S N S
> B I
_
1 S N S
m /
N o
r
B I
1 S G S
O f
f
/
1
I
/
0
n v
0
2
O V 1 B L K
O f
f
/
f
/
f
/
f
/
f
/
f
/
f
/
f
/
f
/
0
O n
F R Q B L K
O f
0
O n
N P S B L K
O f
0
O n
Z P S B L K
O f
0
O n
U V 3 B L K
O f
0
O n
U V 2 B L K
O f
0
O n
U V 1 B L K
O f
0
O n
O V 3 B L K
O f
0
O n
O V 2 B L K
O f
n
O n
 90 
0
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
 To set the Binary Input Sense, enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.
 After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.
BI1SNS
To set the Binary Input 1 Sense, do the following.
 Enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.
BI1SGS
To set the Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select, do the following.
 Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=1) or 2(=2) and press the ENTER key.
Others
 Enter 1(=On) to set the function and press the ENTER key. If not setting the function, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
 After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.
4.2.6.9
Binary Output
All the binary outputs of the GRE130 except the relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is
possible to assign one signal or up to four ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay. Available
signals are listed in Appendix C.
It is also possible to attach Instantaneous or delayed or latched reset timing to these signals.
Appendix G shows the factory default settings.
CAUTION
When having changed the binary output settings, release the latch state on the digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
To configure the binary output signals, do the following:
Selection of output relay

Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/
2
B i
n a r
y
O /
P
> B O 1
B O 2
B O 3
B O 4
Note: Setting is required for all binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter 0 to
logic gates #1 to #6 in assigning signals.
 91 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
 Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO"
screen.
/
3
B O 
> L o
g
i
c
/
R e
F u n c
t
i
o
s
e
t
n s
Setting the logic gate type and timer
 Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/
4
L o
L o
g
> L o
i
g
i
/
R e s
c
g i
e
t
_
c
0
O R /
A N D
R e
s
e
t
n s
/
D I
I
c
0
/
D w /
L a t
 Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Delayed) or 2(=Dwell) or 3(=Latched) to select the reset timing
and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "BO" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
Assigning signals
 Select "Functions" on the "BO" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/
4
F u
I
n
♯ 1
n c
t
i
o
n s
_
> I
n
♯ 1
－ － －
I
n
♯ 2
－ － －
I
n
♯ 3
－ － －
I
n
♯ 4
－ － －
T B O
0 .
2
0 s
 Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4 of “---”) by entering the number corresponding to each
signal referring to Appendix A. Do not assign the signal numbers 170 to 173 (signal names:
"BO1 OP" to "BO4 OP"). And set the delay time of timer TBO.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #6, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
 92 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
CAUTION
The CB close control key ｜ is linked to BO1 and the CB open control key ○ is linked to BO2,
when the control function is enabled.
4.2.6.10 LEDs
Six of the LEDs provided by the GRE130 are user-configurable. A configurable LED can be
programmed to indicate an OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual status of
which can be viewed on the LED screen as “Virtual LEDs.” The signals listed in Appendix A can
be assigned to each LED as follows.
CAUTION
When having changed the LED settings, release the latch state on the digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
Selection of LEDs
 Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.
/
2
L E D
> L E D
V i
r
t
u a l
L E D
Selection of real LEDs
 Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.
/
3
L E D
> L E D 1
L E D 2
L E D 3
L E D 4
L E D 5
L E D 6
C B
C L O S E D
Note: The setting is required for all the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates
#1 to #4 in assigning signals.
 Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED" screen.
/
4
> L o
L E D 
g
i
c
/
R e
s
F u n c
t
i
o
n s
L E D
C o
l
o
r
 93 
e
t
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting the logic gate type and reset type
 Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/
5
L o
L o
g
> L o
i
g
c
/
R e
c
g i
s
e
t
_
c
0
O R /
A N D
R e
s
e
t
n s
t
/
I
i
0
L a
t
c
h
 Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
Assigning signals
 Select "Functions" on the "LED" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/
5
F u
I
n
# 1
n c
t
i
o
n s
_
> I
n
#
1
－ － －
I
n
#
2
－ － －
I
n
#
3
－ － －
I
n
#
4
－ － －
 Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4 of “---”) by entering the number corresponding to each
signal referring to Appendix A.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
 Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
Setting the LED color
 Select "LED color" on the "LED " screen or on the "CB CLOSED" screen to display the
"LED color" screen.
/
5
C o
L E D
l
> C o
R /
C o
l
o r
l
o r
_
o
r
G /
Y
0
 94 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
 Select the LED color from red, green or yellow.
 Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.
Repeat this process for the LED colors to be configured.
Selection of virtual LEDs
 Select "Virtual LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "Virtual LED" screen.
/
3
V i
> I
N D 1
I
N D 2
r
t
u a l
L E D
 Select the IND number and press the ENTER key to display the "IND" screen.
/
4
I
N D 1
> R e
s
e
t
F u n c
t
i
o
n s
Setting the reset timing
 Select "Reset" to display the "Reset" screen.
/
5
R e
R e
s
> R e
I
s
e
t
e t
_
s
e
t
n s
t
/
0
L a
t
c
h
 Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "IND" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
Assigning signals
 Select "Functions" on the "IND" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/
5
B I
F n
c
t
i
o
n s
T 1
_
> B I
T 1
－ － －
B I
T 2
－ － －
B I
T 3
－ － －
B I
T 4
－ － －
B I
T 5
－ － －
B I
T 6
－ － －
 95 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
B I
T 7
－ － －
B I
T 8
－ － －
 Assign signals to bits (1 to 8) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to
Appendix A.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the bits 1 to 8, enter 0 for the unassigned bit(s).
 Press the END key to return to the "IND" screen.
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
4.2.6.11 Control
The GRE130 can control the Circuit Breaker(CB) open / close by using the front panel keys.
The interlock function can be used to block the Circuit Breaker(CB) close command with
interlock signals from binary inputs or from a communication command.
To set the control function and interlock function, do the following:
 Select "Control" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Control" screen.
/
2
C o
C o
n t
r
o
l
r
o
l
n t
r
o
l
s
a
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
n t
e
r
l
o
c
k
0
a
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
> C o
D i
I
n t
D i
s
_
0
e
e
 Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select the control function to be in use or not in use and
press the ENTER key.
 Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select the interlock function to be in use or not in use and
press the ENTER key.
Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are not
lit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.
4.2.6.12 Frequency
Setting of the system frequency for the GRE130 relay for 50Hz or 60Hz.
To change the system frequency, do the following:
 Select "Frequency" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Frequency" screen.
/
2
F r
F r
e
> F r
5
0
e
q u e
e
q
H z
q u e
n c
u e
/
y
n c
6 0
n c
y
_
y
0
H z
 Enter 0(=50Hz) or 1(=60Hz) to select the system frequency setting 50Hz or 60Hz and press the
 96 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
ENTER key.
CAUTION
When having changed the system frequency settings, the GRE130 must reboot to enable the
setting change.
4.2.7 Control
The sub-menu "Control" enables the Circuit Breaker(CB) control function from the front panel
keys - ○ , ｜ and L/R .
Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are not
lit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.
4.2.7.1 Local / Remote Control
The "Local/Remote" function provides for change of CB control hierarchy.
 Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.
/
1
C o
n t
r
o
> P a
s
s
w o
r
d (
L o
c
a
l
/
R e
m o
t
c
l
o
s
/
p e
C B
e
l
C t
o
r
l
)
e
n
 Move the cursor to "Local/Remote" on the LCD.
/
1
C o
n t
r
o
P a
s
s
w o
r
d (
> L o
c
a
l
/
R e
m o
t
c
l
o
s
/
p e
C B
e
l
C t
o
r
l
)
e
n
 The L/R key is enabled to change the CB control hierarchy.
4.2.7.2 CB close / open Control
The "CB close/open" function provides CB control.
 Move the cursor to "CB close/open" on the LCD.
/
1
C o
n t
r
o
P a
s
s
w o
r
d (
L o
c
a
l
/
R e
m o
t
c
l
o
s
/
p e
> C B
e
l
C t
o
r
l
)
e
n
 The ｜ and ○ keys are enabled to control the CB – close / open.
 97 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.7.3
Password
For the sake of security of control password protection can be set as follows:
 Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.
 Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
 Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
C o
I
n t
r
o
n p u t
1 2
3 4
5
l
[
6
7 8
9
_
]
0 ＜
 For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".
C o
R e
t
y
1 2
3
4 5
n t
r
o
p e
l
[
6 7
8
9
_
]
0 ＜
 Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen
before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the control screens.
If "Control" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is
displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Control"
sub-menu screens.
C o
n t
r
w o r
d
P a
s
s
1 2
3
4 5
6 7
8
o
l
[
9
_
]
0 ＜
Canceling or changing the password
To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The
"Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.
 98 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
If you forget the password
Press the CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen.
The password protection for the GRE130 is canceled. Set the password again.
4.2.8
Testing
The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as disabling the automatic monitoring function and
forced operation of binary outputs.
Note: When operating the "Test" menu, the "IN SERVICE" LED is flickering. But if an alarm occurs
during the test, the flickering stops. The "IN SERVICE" LED flickers only in a testing state.
4.2.8.1 Scheme Switch
The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "OFF".
Disabling the A.M.F. inhibits trip blocking even in the event of a failure of the items that are being
monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LED
and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded, either.
Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.
 Select "Test" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
/
1
T e
s
s
s
w o
S w i
t
c
h
n a
r
y
> P a
B i
t
r
d (
T e
O /
P
s
t
)
 Select "Switch" to display the "Switch" screen.
/
2
A .
S w i
M .
> A .
O f
t
h
F
_
M .
F
f
O n
/
1
U V T S T
O f
f
/
0
O n
 Enter 0(=Off) to disable the A.M.F. and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 1(=On) for UVTST to disable the UV block when testing UV elements and press the
ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.
4.2.8.2 Binary Output Relay
It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections to external
 99 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time.
 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. Then the LCD
displays the name of the output relay.
/
2
B i
n a r
y
O /
P
B O 1
_
> B O 1
0
D i
s
a
b
l
e
/
E n a
B O 2
D i
s
s
a
b
l
e
/
E n a
a
e
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
0
s
a
F A I
L
D i
a
s
b l
0
B O 4
D i
e
0
B O 3
D i
b l
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
0
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
 Enter 1(=Enable) and press the ENTER key to forcibly operate the output relays.
 After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown
below.
O p
e
r
a t
e
?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
 Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the assigned output relays.
 Release pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.
 Press the CANCEL key to return to the upper "Binary O/P" screen.
4.2.8.3
Password
For the sake of security during testing, password protection can be set as follows:
 Select "Test" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
 Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
 Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
T e
I
s
t
n p u t
1 2
3 4
5
[
6
7 8
9
_
]
0 ＜
 For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".
 100 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
T e
s
t
R e
t
y
p e
1 2
3
4 5
[
6 7
8
9
_
]
0 ＜
 Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen
before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
screens.
If "Test" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is
displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Test"
sub-menu screens.
T e
s
t
P a
s
s
w o r
1 2
3
4 5
6 7
d
8
[
9
_
]
0 ＜
Canceling or changing the password
To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The
"Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password
Press the CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen.
The screen will go off, and the password protection of the GRE130 is cancelled. Set the password
again.
 101 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.3
Personal Computer Interface
The relay can be operated from a personal computer using a USB port on the front panel.
Using a personal computer, the following analysis and display of fault currents are available in
addition to the items available on the LCD screen.
 Display of current waveform:
Oscillograph display
 Symmetrical component analysis:
On arbitrary time span
 Harmonic analysis:
On arbitrary time span
 Frequency analysis:
On arbitrary time span
For details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
4.4
Modbus Interface
GRE130 supports the Modbus communication protocol. This protocol is mainly used when the
relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following measurement and
status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix L.)
 Measurement data:
current
 Status data:
events, fault indications, counters, etc.
 Setting data
 Remote CB operation:
Open / Close
 Time setting / synchronization
The protocol can be used via the RS-485 port on the relay rear panel.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps. These are selected by setting. See
Section 4.2.6.4.
4.5
Clock Function
The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:
 Event records
 Disturbance records
 Fault records
The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with an external clock such as the binary
time standard input signal or Modbus. This can be selected by setting.
The “clock synchronise” function synchronises the relay internal clock to the binary input signal
by the following method. Since the BI signal is an “ON” or “OFF” signal which cannot express
year-month-day and hour-minute-second etc, synchronising is achieved by setting the number of
milliseconds to zero. This method will give accurate timing if the synchronising BI signal is input
every second.
Synchronisation is triggered by an “OFF” to “ON” (rising edge) transition of the BI signal. When
the trigger is detected, the millisecond value of the internal clock is checked, and if the value is
between 0~500ms then it is rounded down. If it is between 500~999ms then it is rounded up (ie the
number of seconds is incremented).
 102 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
n sec
(n+1) sec
500ms
corrected to (n+1) sec
corrected to n sec
t
When the relays are connected with the RSM system as shown in separate volume "PC
INTERFACE RSM100" and "RSM" is selected in the time synchronisation setting, the calendar
clock of each relay is synchronised with the RSM clock. If the RSM clock is synchronised with an
external time standard, then all the relay clocks are synchronised with the external time standard.
Special Mode
The GRE130 will enter the following special mode using a specific key operation.
 LCD contrast adjustment mode
 Light check mode
LCD contrast adjustment mode
When the LCD is not evident or not displayed clearly, it may be that the contrast adjustment for
the LCD may not be appropriate. To adjust the contrast of the LCD screen on any of the screens,
do the following:
 Press ▼ and ▲ ,at same time for 3 seconds or more to shift to the LCD contrast adjustment
mode.
 Press the
or
▼
L C D
▲
C o
n
t
r
a
s
t
key to adjust the contrast.
Freeze mode
CAUTION
This mode is relay function all freeze. Do not shift this mode.
 Press ▲ with
▲
4.6
and CANCEL already pressed , to shift Freeze boot mode.
 Then the LEDs of "In service", "TRIP", "ALARM", "Relay fail" and "LED1-6" are lit while
the LCD screen and other programs are frozen.
When in this mode, protection functions are NOT available.
 103 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
LCD and LED check mode
key for 3 seconds or more when the LCD is off.
 While pressing
▲
 Press
▲
To exercise the LCD and LED check , do the following.
key all LEDs are lit and white dots will appear on the whole LCD screen.
The colors of the configurable LEDs (LED1-6) can be chosen in the user setting color.
CB CLOSED
CB OPEN
LOCAL
REMOTE
IN SERVICE
TRIP
User configurable
LEDs (LED1-6)
ALARM
 Release
▲
RELAY FAIL
key , to finish the LCD and LED check mode.
 104 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
5. Installation
5.1
Receipt of Relays
When relays are received, carry out an acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check for
damage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.
Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.
Relay Mounting
The relay case is designed for flush mounting using two mounting attachment kits.
Appendix E shows the case outlines.
5
127
14
5.2
117
13
5
Fig. 5.2.1 Outline of attachment kit
The attachment kits can be mounted on a panel thickness of 1 – 2.5mm when the M4x8 screws
included with the kit are used. When mounted on a panel thickness of 2.5-4.5mm, M4x10 screws
together with some spacing washers should be used.
5.2.1
Flush Mounting
For flush mounting in a panel cut-out;
・Mount the case in the panel cut-out from the front of the panel. ; See Fig.5.2.2.
・Use the mounting attachment kits set ; See Fig.5.2.3.
・Tighten the M4 screws from the attachment kits ; see Fig.5.2.4.
The allowed range for the fixing screw tightening torque is 1.0…1.4Nm.
Do not tighten the screws too tightly.
 105 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
+0.2
-0.2
160
+0.2
-0.2
143
Fig. 5.2.2 Flush mounting the case into a panel cut-out
Fig. 5.2.3 Side view of GRE130 showing the positions of the mounting attachment kit
 106 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Fig. 5.2.4 Rear view of GRE130 showing the screw location for the mounting attachment kits
5.3
Electrostatic Discharge
CAUTION
Do not remove the relay PCB from the relay case since electronic components on the modules are
very sensitive to electrostatic discharge.
5.4
Handling Precautions
A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand
volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits
can cause serious damage. Often, this damage may not be immediately apparent, but the reliability
of the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case.
Do not expose them to risk of damage.
The relay unit incorporates the highest practical protection for its semiconductor devices.
However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw the relay unit, precautions should be taken to
preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and
manufactured.
CAUTION
 Do not pass the relay unit to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same
electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
 Place the relay unit on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same
potential as yourself.
 Do not place the relay unit in polystyrene trays.
It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be carried
out in a Special Handling Area.
5.5
External Connections
External connections for each relay model are shown in Appendix F.
 107 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6. Commissioning and Maintenance
6.1
Outline of Commissioning Tests
The GRE130 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.
Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and the
conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.
In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC can be fully utilised.
Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to avoid
personal injuries or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.
Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which circuits
function when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.
Measuring elements
Metering and recording
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external
equipment.
The following tests are included:
On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Tripping circuit test
6.2
Cautions
6.2.1
Safety Precautions
CAUTION
 When connecting the cable to the rear of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and attach
the cover provided for the terminal block .
 Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
 108 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.2.2
Precautions for Testing
CAUTION
 When the power is on, do not draw out/insert the relay unit.
 Before turning the power on, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited.
 Be careful to ensure that the relay is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.
 If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
 109 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.3
Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
1 Single-phase voltage source
1 Three-phase voltage source
1 power supply
3 Phase angle meter
3 AC ammeter
3 AC voltmeter
1 Time counter, precision timer
1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the
default settings.
For the default settings, see the Appendix G Relay Setting Sheet.
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage and frequency ratings, and
auxiliary supply voltage rating.
Local PC
When using a local PC, connect it to the relay via the USB port on the front of the relay. RSM100
software is required to run the PC.
For full details, see separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
 110 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Hardware Tests
The tests can be performed without external wiring, but a power supply and AC current and
voltage sources are required.
6.4.1
User Interfaces
This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.
LCD ･LED display
 Apply the rated supply voltage and check that the LCD is off and the "IN SERVICE" LED is lit
green.
Note: If there is a failure, the LCD will display the "ERR: " screen when the supply voltage is applied.
 Press
key for 3 seconds or longer and check that white dots appear on the whole screen and
that all LEDs are lit.
▲
6.4
Operation keys
 Press the ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN
MENU" screen. Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
 Press the ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN
MENU" screen. Press any keys to check that they operate.
6.4.2
Binary Input Circuits
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.1.
GRE130
TB2
-13
-14
- 19

power
supply
TB1

- 20
-13
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
- 14
-12
Figure 6.4.1 Testing Binary Input Circuit
 111 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
 Display the "Binary I/O" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.
/
2
B i
n a r
y
I
/
O
I
P
[
0
0
0 0
0 0
]
O P
[
0
0
0 0
0
]
 Apply the rated supply voltage to terminals 13-14, 15-16, 17,18,19,20-21 of terminal block
TB2.
Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal (IP) changes from 0 to 1. (For
details of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)
The user will be able to perform this test from one terminal to another or for all the terminals at
once.
6.4.3
Binary Output Circuits
This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay drivers
and output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The output
contact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix G.
 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. The LCD displays
the name of the output relay.
/
2
B i
n a r
y
O /
P
B O 1
_
> B O 1
0
D i
s
a
b
l
e
/
E n a
B O 2
D i
s
s
a
b
l
e
/
E n a
a
e
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
0
s
a
F A I
L
D i
a
s
b l
0
B O 4
D i
e
0
B O 3
D i
b l
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
0
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
 Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.
 After completing the entries, press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown
below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be
performed collectively.
 112 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
O p
e
r
a t
e
E N T E R = Y
?
C A N C E L = N
 Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
 Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.
 Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation
6.4.4
AC Input Circuits
This test can be performed by applying check currents to the AC input circuits and verifying that
the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.2.
GRE130
V
TB1
-1
VA
-2
Three-phase
voltage
source
-3
-4
VB
-5
VC
-6
V
-7
Single-phase
voltage
source
power
supply
-8

TB1 -13

-14
12
Figure 6.4.2 Testing AC Input Circuit
To check the metering data on the "Metering" screen, do the following.
"Set. (view)" sub-menu  "Status" screen  "Metering" screen
If the setting is 0 ( = Primary), change the setting to 1 (Secondary) in the "Set. (change)"
sub-menu.
"Set. (change)" sub-menu  "Status" screen  "Metering" screen
Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.
 Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.
"Status" sub-menu  "Metering" screen
 Apply AC currents and check that the displayed values are within 5% of the input values.
 113 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.5 Function Test
CAUTION
The function test may cause the output relays to operate including the tripping output relays.
Therefore, the test must be performed with tripping circuits disconnected.
6.5.1
Measuring Element
Measuring element characteristics are realized using software, so it is possible to verify the overall
characteristics by checking representative points.
Operation of the element under test is observed by assigning the signal number to a configurable
LED or a binary output relay.
Note:
The voltage level at the monitoring jacks is +5V for logic level "1" and less than 0.1V for
logic level "0".
CAUTION
 Use test equipment with more than 1 k of internal impedance when observing the output
signal at the monitoring jacks.
 Do not apply an external voltage to the monitoring jacks.
 Do not leave the A or B terminal shorted to 0V terminal for a long time.
In the case of a three-phase element, it is sufficient to test for a representative phase. The A-phase
element is selected hereafter. Further, the [APPLCT] settings are selected “3P” and “3PV”.
Note: The operating time test for the relay measuring elements at monitoring jacks A or B
does not include operation of the binary output. An overall operating time test, if
required, should be measured at a binary output relay.
Assigning signals to LEDs

Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "2/ LED" screen.
/
2
L E D
> L E D
V i

r
t
u a l
L E D
Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.
/
3
L E D
> L E D 1
L E D 2
L E D 3
L E D 4
L E D 5
L E D 6
C B
C L O S E D
Note: The setting is required for all of the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates
#1 to #4 in assigning signals.
 114 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
 Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED" screen.
/
4
L E D 
> L o
g
i
c
/
R e
s
F u n c
t
i
o
n s
L E D
C o
l
o
e
t
r
 Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/
5
L o
L o
g
> L o
i
g
c
/
R e
c
g i
s
e
t
_
c
0
O R /
A N D
R e
s
e
t
n s
t
/
I
i
0
L a
t
c
h
 Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.
 Select "Functions" on the "LED" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/
5
F u
I
n
♯ 1
n c
t
i
o
n s
_
> I
n
♯ 1
_ _
_
I
n
♯ 2
_ _
_
I
n
♯ 3
_ _
_
I
n
♯ 4
_ _
_
 Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix B,
and assign other gates to “0”.
Assigning signals to Binary Output Relays

Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/
2
B i
n a r
y
> B O 1
B O 2
B O 3
B O 4
 115 
O /
P
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Note: The setting is required for all of the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used,
enter 0 to logic gates In #1 to #4 in assigning signals.
 Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO"
screen.
/
3
B O 
> L o
g
i
c
/
R e
F u n c
t
i
o
s
e
t
n s
 Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/
4
L o
L o
g
> L o
i
g
i
/
R e s
c
g i
e
t
_
c
0
O R /
A N D
R e
s
e
t
n s
/
D l
I
c
0
/
D w /
L a t
 Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "BO" screen.
 Select "Functions" on the "BO" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/
4
F u
I
n
♯ 1
n c
> I
n
♯ 1
I
n
♯ 2
I
n
♯ 3
I
n
♯ 4
T B O
t
i
o
n s
_
_ _
_
_ _
_
_ _
_
_ _
_
0 .
2
0 s
 Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix A
and assign other gates to “0”.
 116 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.5.1.1
Overvoltage and undervoltage elements
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.1.
GRE13
V



Voltage source
TB 1
Variable-
power
supply
-1
-2




TB1 -13
-14
-12

( ) :Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element. Refer to Table 3.2.1.
Figure 6.5.1 Operating Value Test Circuit
Overvoltage and undervoltage elements and their output signal numbers are listed below.
Element
OV1
OV2
OV3
ZPS1
Signal No.
101
108
115
134
Element
UV1
UV2
UV3
ZPS2
Signal No.
122
126
130
135
 Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
press the ENTER key.
 Apply a test voltage and change the magnitude of the voltage applied and measure the value
at which the element operates.
Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.
Operating value test of OV1, OV2, OV3, ZPS1, ZPS2
 Apply rated voltage as shown in Figure 6.5.1.
 Increase the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the
measured value is within  5% of the setting.
Operating value test of UV1, UV2, UV3
 Apply rated voltage and frequency as shown Figure 6.5.1.
 Decrease the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the
measured value is within  5% of the setting.
Operating time check of OV1, UV1, ZPS1 IDMT curves
 Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure the
operating time.
 Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.1.1 and 2.1.2. Check the measured operating time.
 117 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.5.1.2
Negative sequence overvoltage element NPS1 and NPS2
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.2.
GRE130
V
Three-phase
Voltage
source
power
supply
Va
TB1 -1
Vb
-3
Vc
VN
-5
-6

TB1 -13

-14
-12
Figure 6.5.2 Testing NOV elements
The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element
Signal No.
NPS1
136
NPS2
137
 Apply a three-phase balanced voltage and the check the value of the operating voltage by
increasing the magnitude of the voltage applied.
Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.
Operating time check of NPS1 IDMT curve
 Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure the
operating time.
 Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.1.4. Check the measured operating time.
 118 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.5.1.3
Frequency Elements
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.3.
GRE130

VariableFrequency /

Voltage source
power
supply
V
f
TB1
-1
-2

TB1 -13

-14
-12
Figure 6.5.3 Operating Value Test Circuit
Frequency elements and their output signal numbers are listed below.
Element
Signal No.
FRQ1
FRQ2
FRQ3
FRQ4
FVBLK
251
252
253
254
255
Overfrequency or underfrequency elements FRQ1 to FRQ4
Note: Each element characteristic, overfrequency or underfrequency, is determined by the scheme
switch [FT1] to [FT4] settings. Check the scheme switch setting and characteristic of each element
before testing .
 Apply rated voltage and frequency as shown in Figure 6.5.3.
For the overfrequency characteristic,
 Increase the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the
measured value is within  0.005Hz of the setting.
For the underfrequency characteristics,
 Decrease the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that
the measured value is within  0.005Hz of the setting.
Undervoltage block test, FVBLK
 Apply rated voltage and change the magnitude of the frequency to operate an element.
 Maintain the frequency at which the element is operating, and change the magnitude of the
voltage applied from the rated voltage to less than the FVBLK setting voltage. And then,
check that the element resets.
6.5.2
Protection Scheme
In the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault,
fault and post-fault conditions.
Tripping is observed with the tripping command output relays operate after a simulated fault
occurs.
 119 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.5.3
Metering and Recording
The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.
Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "Fault record"
screen and check that the descriptions are correct for the fault concerned.
Recording events are listed in Appendix B. There are internal events and external events from
binary input commands. Event recording from an external event can be checked by changing the
status of binary input command signals. Change the status in the same way as the binary input
circuit test (see Section 6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "Event record"
screen is correct. Some of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.
Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD display
only shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance record"
screen and check that the descriptions are correct.
Details can be displayed on a PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details on
how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100 Manual.
6.6
Conjunctive Tests
6.6.1
On Load Test
To check the polarity of the current and voltage transformers, check the load current, system
voltage and their respective phase angles using the metering displays on the LCD screen.
 Open the "Auto-supervision" screen and check that no message appears.
 Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu to check the above.
/
Note:
6.6.2
2
M e
t
e
r
i
n g
V a
*
*
.
*
*
k V
V b
*
*
.
*
*
k V
V c
*
*
.
*
*
k V
V e
s
*
*
.
*
*
k V
V a
b
*
*
.
*
*
k V
V b
c
*
*
.
*
*
k V
V c
a
*
*
.
*
*
k V
V 1
*
*
*
.
*
k V
V 2
*
*
*
.
*
k V
V 0
*
*
.
*
*
k V
f
*
*
.
*
*
H z
The magnitude of current can be set in values for either the primary side or the secondary
side by a setting. (The default setting is the secondary side.)
Tripping Circuit Test
The tripping circuit, including the circuit breaker, is checked by forcibly operating the output relay
and monitoring the circuit breaker to confirm that it has tripped. Forcible operation of the output
relay is performed on the "Binary O/P " screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section
6.4.3.
 120 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Tripping circuit
 Set the breaker to be closed.
 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/
2
B i
n a r
y
O /
P
B O 1
_
> B O 1
0
D i
s
a
b
l
e
/
E n a
B O 2
D i
s
s
a
b
l
e
/
E n a
a
e
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
0
s
a
F A I
L
D i
a
s
b l
0
B O 4
D i
e
0
B O 3
D i
b l
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
0
b
l
e
/
E n a
b l
e
BO1 to BO4 are output relays with one normally open contact.
 Enter 1 for BO2 and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key. Then the LCD will display the screen shown below.
O p
e
r
a t
e
E N T E R = Y
?
C A N C E L = N
 Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relay BO2 and check that the A-phase
breaker is tripped.
 Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.
 Repeat the above for BO1, BO3 and BO4.
 121 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.7
Maintenance
6.7.1
Regular Testing
The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits that can not be supervised are binary
input and output circuits and human interfaces.
Therefore, regular testing is minimised to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test procedures
are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.
6.7.2
Failure Tracing and Repair
Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued from the binary output FAIL
relay and the failure is indicated on the front panel by the LED indicators or LCD display. It is also
recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Err: " screen on the LCD. Table 6.7.1
shows LCD messages and failure locations.
The locations marked with (1) have a higher probability than locations marked with (2).
Table 6.7.1 LCD Message and Failure Location
Message
Failure location
Relay Unit
Err: SUM
(Flash memory)
Err: RAM
(SRAM)
Err: BRAM
(Backup RAM)
Err: EEP
(EEPROM)
Err: A/D
(A/D converter)
Err: V0, Err: V2
 (AC input circuit)(1)
Err: DRIVER
 (BI,BO circuit)(1)
AC cable
CB or Cable
 (2)
 (2)
( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including its peripheral circuits.
* ; Error level set in VT supervision function.
Alarms detected by the relay self-supervision are traced by checking the "ALM: " screen on the
LCD. Table 6.7.2 shows LCD messages and alarm locations.
Table 6.7.2 LCD Message and Alarm Location
Message
Failure location
Relay Unit
AC cable
CB or Cable
ALM: VT
(AC input circuit)(1)
ALM: TC
(Trip circuit)(1)
 (2)
ALM: CB
(Circuit breaker)(1)
 (2)
ALM: TP COUNT
(Trip count)(1)
 (2)
 (2)
( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including peripheral circuits.
 122 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
If there is no message is shown on the LCD it means that the failure location is either in the power
supply circuit or in the microprocessors. If the "ALARM" LED is off, the failure is in the power
supply circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors. Replace the relay unit in both
cases after checking if the correct voltage is applied to the relay.
If a failure is detected by the automatic supervision function or regular testing, replace the failed
relay unit.
Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during a regular test, confirm the following
first:
- Test circuit connections are correct.
- Correct power voltage is applied.
- Correct AC inputs are applied.
- Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.
6.7.3
Replacing Failed Relay Unit
If the failure is identified to be in the relay and the user has a spare relay, the user can recover the
protection by replacing the relay.
Repairs at site should be limited to relay replacement. Maintenance at component level is not
recommended.
Check that the replacement relay unit has an identical Model Number and relay version (software
type form) as the relay to be replaced.
The Model Number is indicated on the front of the relay. For the relay version, see Section 4.2.5.1.
Replacing the relay unit
CAUTION
After replacing the relay unit, check the settings.
The procedure for relay withdrawal and insertion is as follows:
 Switch off the DC power supply.
WARNING Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit when the power supply is
de-energized. It will take approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to
discharge.
 Remove the terminal blocks from the relay leaving the wiring in place.
 To remove the relay unit from the panel, the attachment screws must be removed.
 Insert the (spare) relay unit following the reverse procedure.
CAUTION
To avoid risk of damage:
 When the attachment kits are removed, support the relay to ensure that it does not fall
from panel.
 Ensure that the relay front cover panel is closed throughout the operation.
6.7.4
Resumption of Service
After replacing the failed relay unit or repairing failed external circuits, take the following
procedures to restore the relay to the service.
 Switch on the power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the
"ALARM" red LED is not lit.
 Connect the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.
6.7.5
Storage
The spare relay should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard 60255-6 the
storage temperature should be 25C to +70C, but the temperature of 0C to +40C is
recommended for long-term storage.
 123 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
7. Putting Relay into Service
The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing the
commissioning tests or maintenance tests.
 Check that all the external connections are correct.
 Check the settings of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clock
are correct.
In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.
 Clear any unnecessary records on faults, alarms, events, disturbances and counters which are
recorded during the tests.
 Press ▼ key and check that no failure message is displayed on the "Auto-supervision" screen.
 Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and no other LEDs are lit on the front panel.
 124 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix A
Signal List
 125 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
SIGNAL Name
BI1 COMAND
BI2 COMAND
BI3 COMAND
BI4 COMAND
BI5 COMAND
BI6 COMAND
SET. GROUP1
SET. GROUP2
OV1 BLOCK
OV2 BLOCK
OV3 BLOCK
UV1 BLOCK
UV2 BLOCK
UV3 BLOCK
ZPS1 BLOCK
ZPS2 BLOCK
NPS1 BLOCK
NPS2 BLOCK
TC FAIL
CB CONT OPN
CB CONT CLS
EXT TRIP-3PH
EXT TRIP-APH
EXT TRIP-BPH
EXT TRIP-CPH
REMOTE RESET
SYNC CLOCK
STORE RECORD
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
Contents
Not in use
Binary Input signal of BI1
Binary Input signal of BI2
Binary Input signal of BI3
Binary Input signal of BI4
Binary Input signal of BI5
Binary Input signal of BI6
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
BI command of change active setting group1
BI command of change active setting group2
Not in use
Not in use
BI command of OV1 protection scheme block
BI command of OV2 protection scheme block
BI command of OV3 protection scheme block
BI command of UV1 protection scheme block
BI command of UV2 protection scheme block
BI command of UV3 protection scheme block
BI command of ZPS1 protection scheme block
BI command of ZPS2 protection scheme block
BI command of NPS1 protection scheme block
BI command of NPS2 protection scheme block
BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm
BI command of CB N/O contact
BI command of CB N/C contact
BI command of External trip (3 Phase)
BI command of External trip (A Phase)
BI command of External trip (B Phase)
BI command of External trip (C Phase)
BI command of Remote reset
BI command of Synchronize Clock
BI command of Store Disturbance Record
BI command of Alarm1
BI command of Alarm2
BI command of Alarm3
BI command of Alarm4
Not in use
Not in use
 126 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No.
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
SIGNAL Name
FRQ1 BLOCK
FRQ2 BLOCK
FRQ3 BLOCK
FRQ4 BLOCK
OV1-A INST
OV1-B INST
OV1-C INST
OV2-A INST
OV2-B INST
OV2-C INST
OV1-A
OV1-B
OV1-C
OV2-A
OV2-B
OV2-C
OV3-A
OV3-B
OV3-C
UV1-A
UV1-B
UV1-C
UV2-A
UV2-B
UV2-C
UV3-A
UV3-B
UV3-C
Contents
Not in use
BI command of FRQ1 protection scheme block
BI command of FRQ2 protection scheme block
BI command of FRQ3 protection scheme block
BI command of FRQ4 protection scheme block
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
OV1-A relay element start
OV1-B relay element start
OV1-C relay element start
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
OV2-A relay element start
OV2-B relay element start
OV2-C relay element start
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
OV1-A relay element output
OV1-B relay element output
OV1-C relay element output
OV2-A relay element output
OV2-B relay element output
OV2-C relay element output
OV3-A relay element output
OV3-B relay element output
OV3-C relay element output
UV1-A relay element output
UV1-B relay element output
UV1-C relay element output
UV2-A relay element output
UV2-B relay element output
UV2-C relay element output
UV3-A relay element output
UV3-B relay element output
UV3-C relay element output
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
 127 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No.
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
SIGNAL Name
ZPS1
ZPS2
NPS1
NPS2
VBLK
OV1 TRIP
OV1-A TRIP
OV1-B TRIP
OV1-C TRIP
OV2 TRIP
OV2-A TRIP
OV2-B TRIP
OV2-C TRIP
OV3 TRIP
OV3-A TRIP
OV3-B TRIP
OV3-C TRIP
UV1 TRIP
UV1-A TRIP
UV1-B TRIP
UV1-C TRIP
UV2 TRIP
UV2-A TRIP
UV2-B TRIP
UV2-C TRIP
Contents
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
ZPS1 relay element output
ZPS2 relay element output
NPS1 relay element output
NPS2 relay element output
UV protection scheme block
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
OV1 trip command
OV1 trip command (A Phase)
OV1 trip command (B Phase)
OV1 trip command (C Phase)
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
OV2 trip command
OV2 trip command (A Phase)
OV2 trip command (B Phase)
OV2 trip command (C Phase)
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
OV3 trip command
OV3 trip command (A Phase)
OV3 trip command (B Phase)
OV3 trip command (C Phase)
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
UV1 trip command
UV1 trip command (A Phase)
UV1 trip command (B Phase)
UV1 trip command (C Phase)
UV2 trip command
UV2 trip command (A Phase)
UV2 trip command (B Phase)
UV2 trip command (C Phase)
 128 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No.
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
SIGNAL Name
UV3 TRIP
UV3-A TRIP
UV3-B TRIP
UV3-C TRIP
ZPS1 TRIP
ZPS2 ALARM
NPS1 TRIP
NPS2 ALARM
GEN.TRIP
GEN.TRIP-A
GEN.TRIP-B
GEN.TRIP-C
GEN.ALARM
UV1-A INST
UV1-B INST
UV1-C INST
A.M.F.OFF
RELAY FAIL
RELAY FAIL-A
TCSV
CBSV
TC ALARM
OT ALARM
V0 ERR
V2 ERR
BO1OP
BO2OP
BO3OP
BO4OP
Contents
UV3 trip command
UV3 trip command (A Phase)
UV3 trip command (B Phase)
UV3 trip command (C Phase)
ZPS1 trip command
ZPS2 alarm command
NPS1 trip command
NPS2 alarm command
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
General Trip command
General Trip command (A Phase)
General Trip command (B Phase)
General Trip command (C Phase)
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
General alarm command
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
UV1-A relay element start
UV1-B relay element start
UV1-C relay element start
Automatic monitoring function off
Relay failure & trip blocked alarm
Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked)
Trip circuit supervision failure
Circuit breaker status monitoring failure
Trip counter alarm
Not in use
Operate time alarm
V0 error
V2 error
Binary Output1 operated
Binary Output2 operated
Binary Output3 operated
Binary Output4 operated
 129 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No.
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
SIGNAL Name
UV2-A INST
UV2-B INST
UV2-C INST
LCD IND.
LCD IND1.
LCD IND2.
TESTING
ZPS1 INST
ZPS2 INST
NPS1 INST
NPS2 INST
F11
F12
DF-R1
DF-D1
F21
F22
DF-R2
Contents
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
UV2-A relay element start
UV2-B relay element start
UV2-C relay element start
Not in use
LCD indication (Virtual LED) command
LCD indication1 (Virtual LED) command
LCD indication2 (Virtual LED) command
Not in use
Not in use
Testing LED lit output
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
ZPS1 relay element start
ZPS2 relay element start
NPS1 relay element start
NPS2 relay element start
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
FRQ1 relay F11 element output
FRQ1 relay F12 element output
DFRQ1 relay rise element output
DFRQ1 relay decay element output
FRQ2 relay F21 element output
FRQ2 relay F22 element output
DFRQ2 relay rise element output
 130 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No.
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
270
271
SIGNAL Name
DF-D2
F31
F32
DF-R3
DR-D3
F41
F42
DF-R4
DF-D4
F11 TRIP
F12 TRIP
DF-R1 TRIP
DF-D1 TRIP
FRQ1 TRIP
F21 TRIP
F22 TRIP
DF-R2 TRIP
DF-D2 TRIP
FRQ2 TRIP
F31 TRIP
F32 TRIP
DF-R3 TRIP
DF-D3 TRIP
FRQ3 TRIP
F41 TRIP
F42 TRIP
DF-R4 TRIP
DF-D4 TRIP
FRQ4 TRIP
FRQ STAGE1 TRIP
FRQ STAGE2 TRIP
FRQ STAGE3 TRIP
FRQ STAGE4 TRIP
FVBLK
LOCAL
REMOTE
Contents
DFRQ2 relay decay element output
FRQ3 relay F31 element output
FRQ3 relay F32 element output
DFRQ3 relay rise element output
DFRQ3 relay decay element output
FRQ4 relay F41 element output
FRQ4 relay F42 element output
DFRQ4 relay rise element output
DFRQ4 relay decay element output
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
FRQ1 relay F11 Trip command
FRQ1 relay F12 Trip command
DFRQ1 relay rise Trip command
DFRQ1 relay decay Trip command
FRQ1 relay Trip command
FRQ2 relay F21 Trip command
FRQ2 relay F22 Trip command
DFRQ2 relay rise Trip command
DFRQ2 relay decay Trip command
FRQ2 relay Trip command
FRQ3 relay F31 Trip command
FRQ3 relay F32 Trip command
DFRQ3 relay rise Trip command
DFRQ3 relay decay Trip command
FRQ3 relay Trip command
FRQ4 relay F41 Trip command
FRQ4 relay F42 Trip command
DFRQ4 relay rise Trip command
DFRQ4 relay decay Trip command
FRQ4 relay Trip command
FRQ1 relay Trip command
FRQ2 relay Trip command
FRQ3 relay Trip command
FRQ4 relay Trip command
Frequency element scheme block
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Circuit Breaker Control hierarchy Local state
Circuit Breaker Control hierarchy Remote state
 131 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No.
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
SIGNAL Name
CB_OPN_L
CB_CLS_L
CB_OPN_BI
CB_CLS_BI
CB_OPN_COMM
CB_CLC_COMM
LOCK_BI
LOCK_COMM
CB OPOUT
CB CLOUT
IDMT_s1_a
IDMT_s1_b
IDMT_s1_c
IDMT_s1_n
IDMT_s1_z
IDMT_s2_a
IDMT_s2_b
IDMT_s2_c
IDMT_s2_n
IDMT_s2_z
Contents
Local SW command of Circuit Breaker open
Local SW command of Circuit Breaker close
BI command of Circuit Breaker open
BI command of Circuit Breaker close
Communication command of Circuit Breaker open
Communication command of Circuit Breaker close
BI command of Interlock
Communication command of Interlock
Circuit Breaker Open output
Circuit Breaker Close output
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
OV1 integrated value = 0 (A Phase)
OV1 integrated value = 0 (B Phase)
OV1 integrated value = 0 (C Phase)
ZPS1 integrated value = 0
NPS1 integrated value = 0
OV2 integrated value = 0 (A Phase)
OV2 integrated value = 0 (B Phase)
OV2 integrated value = 0 (C Phase)
ZPS2 integrated value = 0
NPS2 integrated value = 0
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
 132 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix B
Event Record Items
 133 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
ID.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
LCD indication
GEN.trip
GEN.trip-A
GEN.trip-B
GEN.trip-C
GEN.trip-AB
GEN.trip-BC
GEN.trip-CA
OV1-A trip
OV1-B trip
OV1-C trip
OV2-A trip
OV2-B trip
OV2-C trip
OV3-A alarm
OV3-B alarm
OV3-C alarm
UV1-A trip
UV1-B trip
UV1-C trip
UV2-A trip
UV2-B trip
UV2-C trip
UV3-A alarm
UV3-B alarm
UV3-C alarm
OV1-AB trip
OV1-BC trip
OV1-CA trip
OV2-AB trip
OV2-BC trip
OV2-CA trip
OV3-AB alarm
OV3-BC alarm
OV3-CA alarm
UV1-AB trip
UV1-BC trip
UV1-CA trip
UV2-AB trip
UV2-BC trip
UV2-CA trip
UV3-AB alarm
UV3-BC alarm
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Contents
General trip command
General trip command (A Phase)
General trip command (B Phase)
General trip command (C Phase)
General trip command (A-B Phase)
General trip command (B-C Phase)
General trip command (C-A Phase)
OV1 trip command (A Phase)
OV1 trip command (B Phase)
OV1 trip command (C Phase)
OV2 trip command (A Phase)
OV2 trip command (B Phase)
OV2 trip command (C Phase)
OV3 alarm command (A Phase)
OV3 alarm command (B Phase)
OV3 alarm command (C Phase)
UV1 trip command (A Phase)
UV1 trip command (B Phase)
UV1 trip command (C Phase)
UV2 trip command (A Phase)
UV2 trip command (B Phase)
UV2 trip command (C Phase)
UV3 alarm command (A Phase)
UV3 alarm command (B Phase)
UV3 alarm command (C Phase)
OV1 trip command (A-B Phase)
OV1 trip command (B-C Phase)
OV1 trip command (C-A Phase)
OV2 trip command (A-B Phase)
OV2 trip command (B-C Phase)
OV2 trip command (C-A Phase)
OV3 alarm command (A-B Phase)
OV3 alarm command (B-C Phase)
OV3 alarm command (C-A Phase)
UV1 trip command (A-B Phase)
UV1 trip command (B-C Phase)
UV1 trip command(C-A Phase)
UV2 trip command (A-B Phase)
UV2 trip command (B-C Phase)
UV2 trip command(C-A Phase)
UV3 alarm command (A-B Phase)
UV3 alarm command (B-C Phase)
 134 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No.
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
LCD indication
UV3-CA alarm
OV1 trip
OV2 trip
OV3 trip
UV1 trip
UV2 trip
UV3 trip
ZPS1 trip
ZPS2 alarm
NPS1 trip
NPS2 alarm
OV1-A
OV1-B
OV1-C
OV2-A
OV2-B
OV2-C
OV3-A
OV3-B
OV3-C
UV1-A
UV1-B
UV1-C
UV2-A
UV2-B
UV2-C
UV3-A
UV3-B
UV3-C
OV1-AB
OV1-BC
OV1-CA
OV2-AB
OV2-BC
OV2-CA
OV3-AB
OV3-BC
OV3-CA
UV1-AB
UV1-BC
UV1-CA
UV2-AB
UV2-BC
UV2-CA
UV3-AB
UV3-BC
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Contents
UV3 alarm command (C-A Phase)
OV1 trip command
OV2 trip command
OV3 trip command
UV1 trip command
UV2 trip command
UV3 trip command
ZPS1 trip command
ZPS2 alarm command
NPS1 trip command
NPS2 alarm command
OV1-A relay element operating
OV1-B relay element operating
OV1-C relay element operating
OV2-A relay element operating
OV2-B relay element operating
OV2-C relay element operating
OV3-A relay element operating
OV3-B relay element operating
OV3-C relay element operating
UV1-A relay element operating
UV1-B relay element operating
UV1-C relay element operating
UV2-A relay element operating
UV2-B relay element operating
UV2-C relay element operating
UV3-A relay element operating
UV3-B relay element operating
UV3-C relay element operating
OV1-AB relay element operating
OV1-BC relay element operating
OV1-CA relay element operating
OV2-AB relay element operating
OV2-BC relay element operating
OV2-CA relay element operating
OV3-AB relay element operating
OV3-BC relay element operating
OV3-CA relay element operating
UV1-AB relay element operating
UV1-BC relay element operating
UV1-CA relay element operating
UV2-AB relay element operating
UV2-BC relay element operating
UV2-CA relay element operating
UV3-AB relay element operating
UV3-BC relay element operating
 135 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No.
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
LCD indication
UV3-CA
OV1
OV2
OV3
UV1
UV2
UV3
ZPS1
ZPS2
NPS1
NPS2
VBLK
BI1 command
BI2 command
BI3 command
BI4 command
BI5 command
BI6 command
SET. group1
SET. group2
OV1 block
OV2 block
OV3 block
UV1 block
UV2 block
UV3 block
ZPS1 block
ZPS2 block
NPS1 block
NPS2 block
TC fail
CB CONT OPN
CB CONT CLS
EXT trip-3PH
EXT trip-APH
EXT trip-BPH
EXT trip-CPH
Remote reset
SYNC
Store record
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
Relay fail
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Contents
UV3-CA relay element operating
OV1 relay element operating
OV2 relay element operating
OV3 relay element operating
UV1 relay element operating
UV2 relay element operating
UV3 relay element operating
ZPS1 relay element operating
ZPS2 relay element operating
NPS1 relay element operating
NPS2 relay element operating
VBLK element operating
Binary input signal of BI1
Binary input signal of BI2
Binary input signal of BI3
Binary input signal of BI4
Binary input signal of BI5
Binary input signal of BI6
BI command of change active setting group1
BI command of change active setting group2
BI command of OV1 protection scheme block
BI command of OV2 protection scheme block
BI command of OV3 protection scheme block
BI command of UV1 protection scheme block
BI command of UV2 protection scheme block
BI command of UV3 protection scheme block
BI command of ZPS1 protection scheme block
BI command of ZPS2 protection scheme block
BI command of NPS1 protection scheme block
BI command of NPS2 protection scheme block
BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm
BI command of CB N/O contact
BI command of CB N/C contact
BI command of External trip (3 Phase)
BI command of External trip (A Phase)
BI command of External trip (B Phase)
BI command of External trip (C Phase)
BI command of Remote reset
BI command of Store Disturbance Record
BI command of Alarm1
BI command of Alarm2
BI command of Alarm3
BI command of Alarm4
Relay failure & trip blocked alarm
 136 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No.
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
LCD indication
Relay fail-A
TC err
CB err
V0 err
V2 err
TP COUNT ALM
F.record CLR
E.record CLR
D.record CLR
TP COUNT
IND.reset
Contents
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
On
On
On
On
On
145 Data lost
On
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
On
On
On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Sys.Set Change
Rly.Set Change
Grp.Set Change
OV1-A INST
OV1-B INST
OV1-C INST
OV2-A INST
OV2-B INST
OV2-C INST
UV1-A INST
UV1-B INST
UV1-C INST
UV2-A INST
UV2-B INST
UV2-C INST
OV1-AB INST
OV1-BC INST
OV1-CA INST
OV2-AB INST
OV2-BC INST
OV2-CA INST
UV1-AB INST
UV1-BC INST
UV1-CA INST
UV2-AB INST
UV2-BC INST
UV2-CA INST
OV1 INST
OV2 INST
UV1 INST
UV2 INST
ZPS1 INST
ZPS2 INST
No.
Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked)
Trip circuit supervision failure
Circuit Breaker failure
Zero phase input circuit failure
VT circuit supervision failure
Trip counter alarm
Clear Fault records
Clear Event records
Clear Disturbance records
Clear Trip counter
Reset indication for Trip mode, Alarm etc.
Record and time for data lost with power supply
de-energized for an extended period
System setting change command
Relay setting change command
Group setting change command
OV1-A relay element start
OV1-B relay element start
OV1-C relay element start
OV2-A relay element start
OV2-B relay element start
OV2-C relay element start
UV1-A relay element start
UV1-B relay element start
UV1-C relay element start
UV2-A relay element start
UV2-B relay element start
UV2-C relay element start
OV1-AB relay element start
OV1-BC relay element start
OV1-CA relay element start
OV2-AB relay element start
OV2-BC relay element start
OV2-CA relay element start
UV1-AB relay element start
UV1-BC relay element start
UV1-CA relay element start
UV2-AB relay element start
UV2-BC relay element start
UV2-CA relay element start
OV1 relay element start
OV2 relay element start
UV1 relay element start
UV2 relay element start
ZPS1 relay element start
ZPS2 relay element start
 137 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No.
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
LCD indication
NPS1 INST
NPS2 INST
FREQ1 trip
FREQ2 trip
FREQ3 trip
FREQ4 trip
FREQ1 block
FREQ2 block
FREQ3 block
FREQ4 block
Local
Remote
CB OPC_L
CB CLC_L
CB OPC_BI
CB CLC_BI
CB OPC_COMM
CB CLC_COMM
LOCK_BI
LOCK_COMM
CB OPOUT
CB CLOUT
Contents
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
No.
NPS1 relay element start
NPS2 relay element start
FREQ1 relay element operating
FREQ2 relay element operating
FREQ3 relay element operating
FREQ4 relay element operating
BI command of FREQ1 protection scheme block
BI command of FREQ2 protection scheme block
BI command of FREQ3 protection scheme block
BI command of FREQ4 protection scheme block
CB Control hierarchy Local state
CB Control hierarchy Remote state
Local SW command of CB Open
Local SW command of CB Close
BI command of CB Open
BI command of CB Close
Communication command of CB Open
Communication command of CB Close
BI command of Interlock
Communication command of Interlock
CB Open Output
CB Close Output
 138 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix C
Binary Output Default Setting List
 139 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Relay
Model
BO
No.
Terminal
No.
GRE130 BO1
-410 BO2
TB2:
1-2
3–4
BO3
BO4
R.F.
5-6
7-8
9 - 10
GRE130 BO1
-411 BO2
TB2:
1-2
3–4
BO3
BO4
R.F.
5-6
7-8
9 - 10
Signal
Name
Contents
Setting
Signal No.
Logic
(OR:0,
AND:1)
Reset
(Inst:0, Del:1
Latch:2)
Off (Link to CB Close SW)
Relay trip (General)
(Link to CB Open SW)
GENERAL ALARM Relay alarm (General)
NON
Off
Relay fail
0
141
0
0
1
1
150
0
0
0
1
1
Off (Link to CB Close SW)
Relay trip (General)
(Link to CB Open SW)
GENERAL ALARM Relay alarm (General)
NON
Off
Relay fail
0
141
0
0
1
1
150
0
0
0
1
1
NON
GENERAL TRIP
NON
GENERAL TRIP
 140 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix D
Details of Relay Menu and
LCD & Button Operation
 141 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1 b-1
MAIN MENU
Record
Status
Set. (view)
Set. (change)
Control
Test
/1 Record
Fault
Event
Disturbance
Counter
/2 Fault
View record
Clear
Refer to Section
4.2.3.1.
/3 Fault
#1 16/Jul/2010
18:13:57.031
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 Event
View record
Clear
Refer to Section
4.2.3.2.
/3 Event
16/Jul/2010
Ext. trip A On
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 Disturbance
View record
Clear
Refer to Section
4.2.3.3.
/3 Disturbance
#1 16/Jul/2010
18:13:57.401
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
a-1
a-1 b-1
 142 
/4 Fault #1
16/Jul/2010
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
/2 Counter
View counter
Clear Trips
Clear Trips A
Clear Trips B
Clear Trips C
/3 Counter
Trips *****
TripsA *****
TripsB *****
TripsC *****
Clear Trips?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips A?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips B?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips C?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear  I^yA?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear  I^yB?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear  I^yC?
END=Y CANCEL=N
 143 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1
/1 Status
Metering
Binary I/O
Relay element
Time sync.
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast
/2 Metering
Va **.** kV
/2 Binary I/O
IP [0000 00 ]
/2 Ry element
AN OV1-4[0000
]
Refer to Section 4.2.4.
/2 Time sync.
*BI: Act.
/2 16/Jul/2010
22:56:19 [L]
/2 LCD contrast
/1 Set. (view)
Version
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
Refer to Section 4.2.5
/2 Version
Relay type
Software
GRE130-401A-10
-10
GS1EM1-03-*
/2 Description
Plant name
Description
/2 Comms
Addr.
Switch
/3 Addr.
Addr.
/3 Switch
a-1, b-1
 144 
*
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1 b-1
/2 Record
Event
Disturbance
Counter
/3 Event
BI1 comm.
N/O/R/B
:
3
/3 Disturbance
Time/Starter
Scheme sw
Binary sig.
/4 Time/starter
Time1
2.0s
/4 Scheme sw
/4 Binary sig.
SIG1
51
/3 Counter
Scheme sw
Alarm set
/2 Status
Metering
Time sync.
/3 Metering
/3 Time sync.
/2 Act. gp. =*
Common
Group1
Group2
/3 Common
APPL
/3 Group1
Parameter
Trip
/4 Parameter
Line name
VT ratio


/5 VT ratio
VTS
100
a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1
 145 
/4 Scheme sw
/4 Alarm set
TCALM 10000
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1
/4 Trip
Scheme sw
Prot.element
/6 Application
/5 Scheme sw
Application
OV prot.
UV prot.
ZPS prot.
NPS prot.
FRQ prot.
/6 OV prot.
/6 UV prot.
/6 ZPS prot.
/6 NPS prot.
/6 FRQ prot.
/3 Group2
Parameter
/2 Binary I/P
BI STATUS
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
Alarm1 Text
Alarm2 Text
Alarm3 Text
Alarm4 Text
/5 Prot.element
OV prot.
UV prot.
ZPS prot.
NPS prot.
FRQ prot.
/3 BI STATUS
/3 BI1
Timers
Functions
/6 OV prot.
OV1
10.0V
/6 UV prot.
UV1
10.0V
/6 ZPS prot.
ZPS1 10.0V
/6 NPS prot.
NPS1 10.0V
/6 FRQ prot.
FRQ1
10.0Hz
/4 Timers
BI1PUD 0.00s
/4 Functions
/3 BI6
Timers
Functions

Alarm Text
a-1 b-1
 146 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1 b-1
/2 Binary O/P
BO1 AND, DL
0, 0, 0, 0
BO4 OR , Lat
141, 1, 2, 3
/2 LED
LED
Virtual LED
/2 Control
/2 Frequency
/1 Set.(change)
Password
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
/3 LED
/3 Virtual LED
IND1
IND2
I,O
: Confirmation trap
Change settings?
ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
/2 Description
Plant name
Description
_
Refer to Section
4.2.6.4.
/4 IND2
BIT1
Set.(change)
Password [_ ]
1234567890
Set.(change)
Retype
[_ ]
1234567890
/2 Comms
Addr.
Switch
I,O
: Password trap
Set.(change)
Input
[_ ]
1234567890
Refer to Section
4.2.6.3.
/4 IND1
BIT1
ABCDEFG
_
ABCDEFG
/3 Addr.
Addr
/3 Switch
RS485
a-1 b-2
 147 
Refer to Section
4.2.6.2.
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1 b-2
/2 Record
Event
Disturbance
Counter
Refer to Section
4.2.6.5.
/3 Event
BI1 comm.
BI1 comm.
N/O/R/B
:
:
3 _
/4 Time/starter
/3 Disturbance
Time/starter
Scheme sw
Binary sig.
/4 Scheme sw
/3 Counter
Scheme sw
Alarm set
/4 Scheme sw
/4 Binary sig.
/4 Alarm set
/2 Status
Metering
Time sync.
Refer to Section
4.2.6.6.
/2 Protection
Change act. gp.
Change set.
Copy gp.
/3 Metering
Display
/3 Time sync.
Time sync.
Refer to Section
4.2.6.7.
/3 Change act.
gp.
/3 Act gp.=1
Common
Group1
Group2
/4 Common
APPL
a-1 b-2
c-2
d-2
 148 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1
b-2
c-2
d-2
/4 Group1
Parameter
Trip
/5 Parameter
Line name
CT ratio
_
ABCDEFG
/6 VT ratio
VTS
/5 Trip
Scheme sw
Prot.element
/6 Scheme sw
Application
OV prot.
UV prot.
ZPS prot.
NPS prot.
FRQ prot.
/7 Application
/7 OV prot.
/7 UV prot.
/7 ZPS prot.
/7 NPS prot.
/7 FRQ prot.
/6 Prot.element
OV prot.
UV prot.
ZPS prot.
NPS prot.
FRQ prot.
/7 OV prot.
/7 UV prot.
/7 ZPS prot.
/7 NPS prot.
/4 Group2
Parameter
/7 FRQ prot.
a-1, b-2
c-2
 149 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1 b-2 c-2
/3 Copy A to B
A
_
B
_
/2 Binary I/P
BI Status
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
Alarm1 Text
Alarm2 Text
Alarm3 Text
Alarm4 Text
Refer to Section
4.2.6.8.
/2 Binary O/P
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
Refer to Section
4.2.6.9.
/2 LED
LED
Virtual LED
/3 LED
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
LED6
CB CLOSED
a-1
b-2
c-3
/3 BI Status
BITHR1
/3 BI1
Timers
Functions
/4 Timers
/4 Functions
/3 BI6
Timers
Functions

ABCDEFG
Alarm Text
/3 BO1
Logic/Reset
Functions
/4 Logic/Reset
/4 Functions
/3 BO4
Logic/Reset
Functions
Refer to Section
4.2.6.10.
/4 LED1
Logic/Reset
Functions
LED Color
/4 LED6
Logic/Reset
Functions
LED Color
/4 CB CLOSED
LED Color
 150 
/5 Logic/Reset
/5 Functions
/5 LED Color
/5 LED Color
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1
b-2
c-3
/3 Virtual LED
IND1
IND2
/4 IND1
Reset
Functions
/5 Reset
/5 Functions
/2 Control
/4 IND2
Reset
Functions
: Password trap
/2 Frequency
Control
Password [_ ]
1234567890
/1 Control
Password(Ctrl)
Local/Remote
CB OPEN/CLOSE
Refer to Section 4.2.7
/1 Test
Password(Test)
Switch
Binary O/P
Refer to Section 4.2.8.
Control
Input
[_ ]
1234567890
Refer to Section
4.2.7.2.
Test
Input
[_ ]
1234567890
Refer to Section
4.2.8.2.
Test
Retype
[_ ]
1234567890
: Password trap
Test
Password [_ ]
1234567890
/2 Switch
A.M.F.
1 _
Off/On
UVTST
0
Off/S0/S3
/2 Binary O/P
Control
Retype
[_ ]
1234567890
Operate?
ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
BO1
0 _
Disable/Enable
BO4
0
Disable/Enable
 151 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix E
Case Outline
 152 
177
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
17
149
127
24
Side View
Front View
TB2
160
TB1
143
Rear View
TB2
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
2 holes-φ4
ｆor Panel mounting kit
TB1
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
RJ45
for Optional Unit
Terminal block
Case Outline
 153 
Panel cut-out
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix F
Typical External Connection
 154 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
A
B
C
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
OFF(CB CLOSE)
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
OFF
P
Control
Power
Controled
CB
GRE130-410A
APPL ； 1PP
TB1
1
Vph
2
3
4
5
6
7
Ve
8
9
N.C.
10
11
12 GND POWER
13 + SUPPLY
14 -
P
N
FG
FRONT PANEL
TB2
CB CLOSE
SW
CB OPEN
SW
CB CLOSE
1
2
CB OPEN/TRIP
3
4
*
5
6
CLOSE
COIL
N
AUXILIARY
*
7
8
Relay fail
DEFAULT BI1-2; Off
9
10
N.C. 11
12
AUXILIARY
Available for
TCS
(CB CLOSED)
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
AUXILIARY
Available for
TCS
(CB OPEN)
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
USB Type B
N.C.
Rear PANEL
COM
RJ45
TRIP
COIL
AUXILIARY
Relay fail
indicator
N
13
14
15
16
N
17
18
19
20
22
21
A+ 23
B- 24
N.C.
A+
BCOM
COM
A+
B-
*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A
 155 
1PP setting
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
A
B
C
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
OFF(CB CLOSE)
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
OFF
Control
Power
P
Controled
CB
GRE130-411A
APPL ； 1PN
TB2
CB CLOSE
SW
TB1
1
Vph
2
3
4
5
6
7
Ve
8
9
N.C.
10
11
12 GND POWER
13 + SUPPLY
14 -
P
N
CB OPEN
SW
CB CLOSE
1
2
CB OPEN/TRIP
3
4
*
*
CLOSE
COIL
N
7
8
Relay fail
DEFAULT BI1-2; Off
FG
9
10
N.C. 11
12
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Available for
TCS
AUXILIARY
FRONT PANEL
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
Available for
TCS
(CB CLOSED)
AUXILIARY
(CB OPEN)
AUXILIARY
Threshold
77/154V
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
Rear PANEL
COM
RJ45
5
6
AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY
USB Type B
TRIP
COIL
AUXILIARY
A+
B-
N.C.
Relay fail
indicator
N
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
N
21
23
24
A+
BCOM
COM
A+
B-
*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 411A
 156 
1PN setting
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
A
B
C
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
OFF(CB CLOSE)
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
OFF
Control
Power
P
Controled
CB
GRE130-410A
APPL ； 2PP
2PZ
TB1
1
Vab
2
3
Vbc
4
5
6
7
Ve
8
9
N.C.
10
11
12 GND POWER
13 + SUPPLY
14 -
P
N
FG
FRONT PANEL
TB2
CB CLOSE
SW
CB OPEN
SW
CB CLOSE
1
2
CB OPEN/TRIP
3
4
*
5
6
CLOSE
COIL
N
AUXILIARY
*
Relay fail
DEFAULT BI1-2; Off
N.C.
AUXILIARY
Available for
TCS
(CB CLOSED)
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
AUXILIARY
Available for
TCS
(CB OPEN)
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
7
8
9
10
11
12
Relay fail
indicator
N
13
14
15
16
N
17
N.C. 18
19
20
22
USB Type B
Rear PANEL
COM
RJ45
TRIP
COIL
AUXILIARY
A+
B-
N.C.
21
23
24
A+
BCOM
COM
A+
B-
*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A
 157 
2PP ( 2PZ ) setting
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A
 158 
3PN ( 3PV ) setting
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
A
B
C
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
OFF(CB CLOSE)
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL ALARM
OFF
P
Control
Power
Controled
CB
GRE130-410A
APPL ； 3PP
TB1
1
Vab
2
3
Vbc
4
5
Vca
6
7
Ve
8
9
N.C.
10
11
12 GND POWER
13 + SUPPLY
14 -
P
N
FG
FRONT PANEL
TB2
CB CLOSE
SW
CB OPEN
SW
CB CLOSE
1
2
CB OPEN/TRIP
3
4
*
5
6
CLOSE
COIL
N
AUXILIARY
*
Relay fail
DEFAULT BI1-2; Off
N.C.
AUXILIARY
Available for
TCS
(CB CLOSED)
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
AUXILIARY
Available for
TCS
(CB OPEN)
Threshold
33.6/77/154V
7
8
9
10
11
12
Relay fail
indicator
N
13
14
15
16
N
17
18
N.C.
19
20
22
USB Type B
Rear PANEL
COM
RJ45
TRIP
COIL
AUXILIARY
A+
B-
N.C.
21
23
24
A+
BCOM
COM
A+
B-
*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A
 159 
3PP setting
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix G
Relay Setting Sheet
1. Relay Identification
2. Line parameter
3. Contacts setting
4. Relay setting sheet
 160 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
1. Relay Identification
Date:
Relay type
Serial Number
Frequency
AC voltage
DC supply voltage
Active setting group
Password
Setting
Control
Test
2. Line parameter
VT ratio
PVT:
RVT:
3. Contacts setting
TB2
BO1
Terminal 1-2
BO2
Terminal 3-4
BO3
Terminal 5-6
BO4
Terminal 7-8
BI1
Terminal 13-14
BI2
Terminal 15-16
BI3
Terminal 17-22
BI4
Terminal 18-22
BI5
Terminal 19-22
BI6
Terminal 20-22
 161 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4. Relay setting sheet
Menu
Password
Description
Communi
-cation
Name
Range
Password(Set)
0000 – 9999
Password(Ctrl)
0000 – 9999
Password for Control
Password(Test)
0000 – 9999
Password for Test
Plant name
Specified by user
Description
ditto
Addr.
1 - 247
RS485
9.6 / 19.2
None/Operate/
Reset/Both
None/Operate/
Reset/Both
None/Operate/
Reset/Both
None/Operate/
Reset/Both
None/Operate/
Reset/Both
None/Operate/
Reset/Both
Plant name
Memorandum
for user
Relay ID No.
for Modbus
Baud rate for Modbus
BI1 comm.
BI2 comm.
Event
Record
BI3 comm.
BI4 comm.
BI5 comm.
BI6 comm.
Disturbance
Record
Time1
0.1 – 4.9 s
Time2
0.1 – 4.9 s
OV
10.0 – 200.0 V
UV
1.0 – 130.0 V
NPS
1.0 – 160.0 V
ZPS
1.0 – 160.0 V
Trip
BI
OV
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
 162 
Contents
Password for
Setting change
BI1 command trigger
BI2 command trigger
BI3 command trigger
BI4 command trigger
BI5 command trigger
BI6 command trigger
Recording period
before fault
Recording period
after fault
OV element
for disturbance
UV element
for disturbance
NPS element
for disturbance
ZPS element
for disturbance
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Default
None
(0000)
None
(0000)
None
(0000)
－
－
1
19.2
Both(3)
Both(3)
Both(3)
Both(3)
Both(3)
Both(3)
3.0
2.0
On
On
On
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Menu
Name
UV
NPS
ZPS
SIG1
SIG2
SIG3
SIG4
SIG5
SIG6
SIG7
Disturbance
SIG8
Record
SIG9
SIG10
SIG11
SIG12
SIG13
SIG14
SIG15
SIG16…30
SIG31
SIG32
Range
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
0 - 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
TCSPEN
Off / On / Opt-On
CBSMEN
Off / On
TCAEN
Off / On
TCALM
1 – 10000
Display
Time sync.
Pri / Sec
Off / BI / Modbus
Counter
Status
 163 
Contents
Disturbance Trigger
Disturbance Trigger
Disturbance Trigger
Disturbance Trigger
Trip Circuit
Supervision Enable
Circuit Breaker
State Monitoring
Alarm Enable
Trip Count Alarm
Enable
Trip Count Alarm
Threshold
Metering
Time
Default
On
On
On
51
52
53
63
102
103
104
117
141
142
143
144
145
0
0
0
0
0
Off
Off
Off
10000
Pri
Off
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Menu
Binary
Input
Name
BITHR1
BITHR2
BI1
BI1PUD
BI1DOD
BI1SNS
BI1SGS
OV1BLK
OV2BLK
OV3BLK
UV1BLK
UV2BLK
UV3BLK
ZP1BLK
ZP2BLK
NP1BLK
NP2BLK
Range
48 / 110 /220
110 / 220
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 300.00
Norm / Inv
Off / 1 / 2
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
TCFALM
Off / On
CBOPN
Off / On
CBCLS
Off / On
EXT3PH
Off / On
EXTAPH
Off / On
EXTBPH
Off / On
EXTCPH
Off / On
RMTRST
SYNCLK
Off / On
Off / On
STORCD
Off / On
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
RMTOPN
Off / On
RMTCLS
Off / On
 164 
Contents
BI1,BI2 Threshold
BI3-BI6 Threshold
BI1 Pick-up delay
BI1 Drop-off delay
BI1 Trigger
BI1 Settings Group
OV1 Block
OV2 Block
OV3 Block
UV1 Block
UV2 Block
UV3 Block
ZPS1 Block
ZPS2 Block
NPS1 Block
NPS2 Block
Trip Circuit
Fail Alarm
Circuit Breaker
Open
Circuit Breaker
Closed
External Trip
– 3 Phase
External Trip
– A Phase
External Trip
– B Phase
External Trip
– C Phase
Remote Reset
Synchronize clock
Store Disturbance
Record
Alarm screen 1
Alarm screen 2
Alarm screen 3
Alarm screen 4
Remote CB
Open Control
Remote CB
Close Control
Default
110
110
0.00
0.00
Norm
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Menu
Name
BI1
BI2
CNTLCK
FRQ1BLK
FRQ2BLK
FRQ3BLK
FRQ4BLK
BI2PUD
Range
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
Off / On
0.00 – 300.00
BI2DOD
0.00 – 300.00
BI2SNS
Norm / Inv
BI2SGS
Off / 1 / 2
The following items are same as BI1
BI3PUD
0.00 – 300.00
BI3
BI3DOD
0.00 – 300.00
BI3SNS
Norm / Inv
BI3SGS
Off / 1 / 2
The following items are same as BI1
BI4PUD
0.00 – 300.00
Binary
Input
BI4
BI4DOD
0.00 – 300.00
BI4SNS
Norm / Inv
BI4SGS
Off / 1 / 2
The following items are same as BI1
BI5PUD
0.00 – 300.00
BI5
BI5DOD
0.00 – 300.00
BI5SNS
Norm / Inv
BI5SGS
Off / 1 / 2
The following items are same as BI1
BI6PUD
0.00 – 300.00
BI6
BI6DOD
0.00 – 300.00
BI6SNS
Norm / Inv
BI6SGS
Off / 1 / 2
The following items are same as BI1
Alarm1 Text
Specified by user
Alarm2 Text
Specified by user
Alarm3 Text
Specified by user
Alarm4 Text
Specified by user
 165 
Contents
Interlock input
FRQ1 Block
FRQ2 Block
FRQ3 Block
FRQ4 Block
BI2 Pick-up delay
BI2 Drop-off
delay
BI2 Trigger
BI2 Settings
Group
Default
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
0.00
0.00
BI3 Pick-up delay
BI3 Drop-off
delay
BI3 Trigger
BI3 Settings
Group
0.00
0.00
BI4 Pick-up delay
BI4 Drop-off
delay
BI4 Trigger
BI4 Settings
Group
0.00
0.00
BI5 Pick-up delay
BI5 Drop-off
delay
BI5 Trigger
BI5 Settings
Group
0.00
0.00
BI6 Pick-up delay
BI6 Drop-off
delay
BI6 Trigger
BI6 Settings
Group
0.00
0.00
Alarm1 Text
Alarm2 Text
Alarm3 Text
Alarm4 Text
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
Norm
Off
Norm
Off
Norm
Off
Norm
Off
Norm
Off
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Menu
Name
BO1
Binary
Output
BO2
BO3
BO4
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
Configurable
LED
Contents
Logic Gate Type
Reset Operation
Functions
Functions
Functions
Functions
Delay / Pulse width
Default
OR
DI
141
0
0
0
0.20
OR / AND
Inst / Latch
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
R/G/Y
Logic Gate Type
Reset Operation
Functions
Functions
Functions
Functions
LED Color
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
R
CB CLOSED LED
Color
IND1 Reset
operation
IND2 Reset
operation
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
R
Active setting group
ALARM LED
lighting control
at alarm output
Control Enable
Interlock Enable
Control Hierarchy
(if Control = Enable)
Frequency
1
CB CLOSED Color
R/G/Y
IND1 Reset
Inst / Latch
IND2 Reset
Inst / Latch
IND1
IND2
Active gp.
Active
group /
Common
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
TBO
Same as BO1
Same as BO1
Same as BO1
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
Color
Same as LED1
Same as LED1
Same as LED1
Same as LED1
Range
OR / AND
Ins / DI / Dw / Lat
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0.00 – 10.00 s
BIT1
BIT2
BIT3
BIT4
BIT5
BIT6
BIT7
BIT8
Same as IND1
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
0 – 350
1-2
AOLED
Off / On
Control
Interlock
Disable / Enable
Disable / Enable
Control Hierarchy
Local / Remote
Frequency
50Hz / 60Hz
 166 
Inst
Inst
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
On
Disable
Disable
-(Local)
50Hz
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Menu
Name
Line name
Range
Specified by user
PVT
1 – 20000
RVT
1 – 20000
SVCNT
ALM&BLK / ALM
AC input imbalance
OV1EN
OV2EN
OV3EN
UV1EN
UV2EN
UV3EN
VBKEN
ZPS1EN
ZPS2EN
NPS1EN
NPS2EN
FT1
DFT1
Logic1
FT2
DFT2
Logic2
FT3
DFT3
Logic3
FT4
DFT4
Logic4
OV1
Off / DT/IDMT/C
Off / DT/IDMT/C
Off / On
Off / DT/IDMT/C
Off / DT/IDMT/C
Off / On
Off / On
Off / DT/IDMT/C
Off / DT/IDMT/C
Off / DT/IDMT/C
Off / DT/IDMT/C
Off/O/U/B/OO/UU
Off/R/D/Both
L1/L2/L3/L4/L5
Off/O/U/B/OO/UU
Off/R/D/Both
L1/L2/L3/L4/L5
Off/O/U/B/OO/UU
Off/R/D/Both
L1/L2/L3/L4/L5
Off/O/U/B/OO/UU
Off/R/D/Both
L1/L2/L3/L4/L5
10.0 – 200.0 V
TOV1
0.05 – 100.00
TOV1
0.00 – 300.00 s
TOV1R
OV1DPR
OV2
0.0 – 300.0 s
10 – 98 %
10.0 – 200.0 V
TOV2
0.05 – 100.00
TOV2
0.00 – 300.00 s
TOV2R
OV2DPR
OV3
TOV3
OV3DPR
0.0 – 300.0 s
10 – 98 %
10.0 – 200.0 V
0.00 – 300.00 s
10 – 98 %
OV1 Enable
OV2 Enable
OV3 Enable
UV1 Enable
UV2 Enable
UV3 Enable
UV Block Enable
ZPS1 Enable
ZPS2 Enable
NPS1 Enable
NPS2 Enable
FRQ1 Enable
DFRQ1 Enable
FRQ1 logic
FRQ2 Enable
DFRQ2 Enable
FRQ2 logic
FRQ3 Enable
DFRQ3 Enable
FRQ3 logic
FRQ4 Enable
DFRQ4 Enable
FRQ4 logic
OV1 Threshold
OV1 Time multiplier
(if OV1EN = IDMT)
OV1 Definite time
(if OV1EN = DT)
OV1 Definite time reset
OV1 DO/PU ratio
OV2 Threshold
OV2 Time multiplier
(if OV2EN = IDMT)
OV2 Definite time
(if OV2EN = DT)
OV2 Definite time reset
OV2 DO/PU ratio
OV3 Threshold
OV3 Definite time
OV3 DO/PU ratio
OV
UV
ZPS
NPS
Protection
FRQ
OV
 167 
Contents
Line name
VT ratio of
Phase VT
VT ratio of
Earth Fault CT
Default
-100
100
ALM&
BLK
Off
Off
Off
DT
Off
Off
Off
DT
Off
Off
Off
B
Both
L1
B
Both
L1
B
Both
L1
B
Both
L1
120.0 V
10.00
0.10 s
0.0 s
95%
140.0 V
10.00
0.10 s
0.0 s
95%
160.0 V
0.10 s
95%
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Menu
Name
OV
UV
Protection
OV1-k
OV1-α
OV1-C
OV2-k
OV2-α
OV2-C
UV1
Range
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.000 – 5.000
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.000 – 5.000
5.0 – 130.0 V
TUV1
0.05 – 100.00
TUV1
0.00 – 300.00 s
TUV1R
UV2
0.0 – 300.0 s
5.0 – 130.0 V
TUV2
0.05 – 100.00
TUV2
0.00 – 300.00 s
TUV2R
UV3
TUV3
VBLK
UV1-k
UV1-α
UV1-C
UV2-k
UV2-α
UV2-C
ZPS1
0.0 – 300.0 s
5.0 – 130.0 V
0.00 – 300.00 s
5.0 – 20.0 V
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.000 – 5.000
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.000 – 5.000
1.0 – 160.0 V
TZPS1
0.05 – 100.00
TZPS1
0.00 – 300.00 s
TZPS1R
ZPS2
0.0 – 300.0 s
1.0 – 160.0 V
TZPS2
0.05 – 100.00
TZPS2
0.00 – 300.00 s
TZPS2R
ZPS1-k
ZPS1-α
ZPS1-C
ZPS2-k
ZPS2-α
ZPS2-C
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.000 – 5.000
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.000 – 5.000
ZPS
 168 
Contents
Configurable IDMT
Curve setting.
(if OV1EN = C)
Configurable IDMT
Curve setting.
(if OV2EN = C)
UV1 Threshold
UV1 Time multiplier
(if UV1EN = IDMT)
UV1 Definite time
(if UV1EN = DT)
UV1 Definite time reset
UV2 Threshold
UV2 Time multiplier
(if UV2EN = IDMT)
UV2 Definite time
(if UV2EN = DT)
UV2 Definite time reset
UV3 Threshold
UV3 Definite time
UV Blocking
Configurable IDMT
Curve setting.
(if UV1EN = C)
Configurable IDMT
Curve setting.
(if UV2EN = C)
ZPS1 Threshold
ZPS1 Time multiplier
(if ZPS1EN = IDMT)
ZPS1 Definite time
(if ZPS1EN = DT)
ZPS1 Definite time reset
ZPS2 Threshold
ZPS2 Time multiplier
(if ZPS2EN = IDMT)
ZPS2 Definite time
(if ZPS2EN = DT)
ZPS2 Definite time reset
Configurable IDMT
Curve setting.
(if ZPS1EN = C)
Configurable IDMT
Curve setting.
(if ZPS2EN = C)
Default
1.00
1.00
0.000
1.00
1.00
0.000
60.0 V
10.00
0.10 s
0.0 s
60.0 V
10.00
0.10 s
0.0 s
20.0 V
0.10 s
10.0 V
1.00
1.00
0.000
1.00
1.00
0.000
20.0 V
10.00
0.00 s
0.0 s
40.0 V
10.00
0.00 s
0.0 s
1.00
1.00
0.000
1.00
1.00
0.000
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Menu
Name
NPS1
Range
1.0 – 160.0 V
TNPS1
0.05 – 100.00
TNPS1
0.00 – 300.00 s
TNPS1R
NPS2
0.0 – 300.0 s
1.0 – 160.0 V
TNPS2
0.05 – 100.00
TNPS2
0.00 – 300.00 s
TNPS2R
NPS1-k
NPS1-α
NPS1-C
NPS2-k
NPS2-α
NPS2-C
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.000 – 5.000
0.00 – 300.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.000 – 5.000
45.00 – 55.00 Hz
54.00 – 66.00 Hz
0.00 – 100.00 s
45.00 – 55.00 Hz
54.00 – 66.00 Hz
0.00 – 100.00 s
0.1 – 9.9 Hz/s
45.00 – 55.00 Hz
54.00 – 66.00 Hz
0.00 – 100.00 s
45.00 – 55.00 Hz
54.00 – 66.00 Hz
0.00 – 100.00 s
0.1 – 9.9 Hz/s
45.00 – 55.00 Hz
54.00 – 66.00 Hz
0.00 – 100.00 s
45.00 – 55.00 Hz
54.00 – 66.00 Hz
0.00 – 100.00 s
0.1 – 9.9 Hz/s
45.00 – 55.00 Hz
54.00 – 66.00 Hz
0.00 – 100.00 s
45.00 – 55.00 Hz
54.00 – 66.00 Hz
0.00 – 100.00 s
0.1 – 9.9 Hz/s
40 – 100 V
Off / On
Off / On
NPS
F11
TF11
F12
TF12
DF1
Protection
F21
TF21
F22
TF22
DF2
FRQ
F31
TF31
F32
TF32
DF3
F41
TF41
F42
TF42
DF4
FVBLK
Test
A.M.F.
UVTEST
 169 
Contents
NPS1 Threshold
NPS1 Time multiplier
(if NPS1EN = IDMT)
NPS1 Definite time
(if NPS1EN = DT)
NPS1 Definite time reset
NPS2 Threshold
NPS2 Time multiplier
(if NPS2EN = IDMT)
NPS2 Definite time
(if NPS2EN = DT)
NPS2 Definite time reset
Configurable IDMT
Curve setting.
(if NPS1EN = C)
Configurable IDMT
Curve setting.
(if NPS2EN = C)
Over frequency stage 1
threshold
OF1 time delay
Under frequency stage1
Threshold
UF1 time delay
DFRQ stage1
Over frequency stage 2
Threshold
OF2 time delay
Under frequency stage2
Threshold
UF2 time delay
DFRQ stage2
Over frequency stage 3
Threshold
OF3 time delay
Under frequency stage3
Threshold
UF3 time delay
DFRQ stage3
Over frequency stage 4
Threshold
OF3 time delay
Under frequency stage4
Threshold
UF4 time delay
DFRQ stage4
Under voltage block
Automatic monitoring
Under voltage test
Default
20.0 V
10.00
0.00 s
0.0 s
40.0 V
10.00
0.00 s
0.0 s
1.00
1.00
0.000
1.00
1.00
0.000
51.00 Hz
61.00 Hz
1.00 s
49.00 Hz
59.00 Hz
1.00 s
0.5 Hz/s
51.00 Hz
61.00 Hz
1.00 s
49.00 Hz
59.00 Hz
1.00 s
0.5 Hz/s
51.00 Hz
61.00 Hz
1.00 s
49.00 Hz
59.00 Hz
1.00 s
0.5 Hz/s
51.00 Hz
61.00 Hz
1.00 s
49.00 Hz
59.00 Hz
1.00 s
0.5 Hz/s
40 V
Off
Off
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix H
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)
1. Relay identification
2. Preliminary check
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check
3.3 AC input circuit check
4. Function test
4.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test
4.2 Negative sequence overvoltage elements test
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
 170 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
1.
Relay identification
Type
Serial number
Model
System frequency
Station
Date
Circuit
Engineer
Protection scheme
Witness
Active settings group number
2.
Preliminary check
Ratings
Power supply
Wiring
Calendar and clock
3.
Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check
Binary input circuit
Binary output circuit
3.3 AC input circuit check
 171 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.
Function test
4.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test
(1) Operating value test
Element
Voltage setting
Measured voltage
OV1
OV2
OV3
UV1
UV2
UV3
ZPS1
ZPS2
(2) Operating time test (IDMT)
Element
Multiplier setting
Changed voltage
 Voltage setting
OV1
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
OV2
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
UV1
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
UV2
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
ZPS1
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
ZPS2
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
 172 
Measured time
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2 Negative overvoltage elements test
(1) Operating value test
Element
Voltage setting
Measured voltage
NPS1
NPS2
(2) Operating time test (IDMT)
Element
Multiplier setting
Changed voltage
Measured time
 Voltage setting
NPS1
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
NPS2
 Voltage setting
 Voltage setting
4.3 Frequency elements test
Element
Frequency setting
FRQ1
FRQ2
FRQ3
FRQ4
5.
Protection scheme test
6.
Metering and recording check
 173 
Measured frequency
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix I
Return Repair Form
 174 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
RETURN / REPAIR FORM
Please complete this form and return it to TOSHIBA CORPORATION together with the
GRE130 to be repaired.
TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Operations – Industrial and Power Systems & Services
1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan
For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department
Quality Assurance Section
Type: GRE130
(Example: Type:
Model:
GRE130
Model:
411A
)
Product No.:
Serial No.:
Date:
1.
Reason for returning the relay
 mal-function
 does not operate
 increased error
 investigation required
 others
2.
Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are
very helpful information to investigate the incident.
Please provide relevant information regarding the incident on USB sticl or CD rom, or fill
in the attached fault record sheet and relay setting sheet.
 175 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Fault Record
Date/Month/Year
/
:
Time
/
:
.
(Example: 04/ Jul./ 2002
15:09:58.442)
Faulty phase:
Prefault values
Van:
Vbn:
Vcn:
Vab:
Vbc:
Vca:
Vph:
V0:
V1:
V2:
f:
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
Hz
Fault values
Van:
Vbn:
Vcn:
Vab:
Vbc:
Vca:
Vph:
V0:
V1:
V2:
f:
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
Hz
 176 
/
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.
What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident?
4.
Describe the details of the incident:
5.
Date incident occurred
Day/Month/Year:
/
/
/
(Example: 10/Dec/2010)
6.
Give any comments about the GRE130, including any relevant documents:
 177 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Customer
Name:
Company Name:
Address:
Telephone No.:
Facsimile No.:
Signature:
 178 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix J
Technical Data
 179 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
TECHNICAL DATA
Ratings
AC voltage Vn:
Frequency:
Power supply:
110V
50/60Hz
110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac
(Operative range: 88–300Vdc / 88–264Vac)
48-110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 132Vdc)
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply:
Power supply interruption:
Binary input circuit DC voltage:
24-48Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 60.0Vdc)
maximum 12%
maximum 50ms at 110V
For alarm indication
110-250Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 300Vdc)
48-110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 - 132Vdc)
24-48Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 60.0Vdc)
For trip circuit supervision
Operative range: ≥38.4V (for 110Vdc rating)
≥88V (for 220/250Vdc rating)
≥19.2V (for 48Vdc rating)
≥9.6V (for 24Vdc rating)
Overload Ratings
AC voltage inputs:
2 times rated voltage continuous
Burden
AC phase voltage inputs:
 0.1 VA (at rated voltage)
Power supply:
 10W (quiescent),
Binary input circuit:
 0.5W per input at 220Vdc
 15W (maximum)
Overvoltage Protection (59)
1st, 2nd, 3rd Overvoltage thresholds:
Delay type:
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS:
DTL delay:
DO/PU ratio
Reset Delay:
OFF, 10.0 – 200.0V in 0.1V steps
DTL, IDMTL
0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps
Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
10 - 98% in 1% steps
Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Undervoltage Protection (27)
1st, 2nd, 3rd Undervoltage thresholds:
Delay type:
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS:
DTL delay:
Reset Delay:
OFF, 5.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps
DTL, IDMTL
0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps
Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Zero Sequence Overvoltage (ZPS) Protection (59N)
1st, 2nd ZPS Overvoltage thresholds:
Delay type (1st threshold only):
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS:
DTL delay:
Reset Delay (1st threshold only):
OFF, 1.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps
DTL, IDMTL
0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps
Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
 180 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Negative Sequence Overvoltage (NPS) Protection (47)
1st, 2nd NPS Overvoltage thresholds:
Delay type (1st threshold only):
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS:
DTL delay:
Reset Delay (1st threshold only):
OFF, 1.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps
DTL, IDMTL
0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps
Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Frequency Protection (81U/O)
1st – 4th Under frequency
45.00 – 50.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 50Hz)
54.00 – 60.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 60Hz)
1st – 4th Under frequency
50.00 – 55.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 50Hz)
60.00 – 66.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 60Hz)
0.1 to 9.9Hz/s in 0.1Hz/s steps
0.1 to 9.9Hz/s in 0.1Hz/s steps
Frequency rate-of-change
Timer for stage 1st - 4th
Frequency UV Block
0.00 – 100.00 s in 0.01 s steps
40 – 100V in 1V steps
Accuracy
IDMTL Overvoltage Pick-up:
105% of setting  5%
All Other Overvoltage Pick-ups:
100% of setting  5%
approx, 95% (settable for phase overvoltage)
Overvoltage PU/DO ratio:
IDMTL Undervoltage Pick-up:
All Other Undervoltage Pick-ups:
Undervoltage PU/DO ratio:
Over Frequency Pick-ups:
Under Frequency Pick-ups:
Frequency rate-of-change Pick-ups:
Inverse Operate Time:
95% of setting  5%
100% of setting  5%
approx, 105%
100% of setting  0.05Hz (setting:  rated frequency - 5.00Hz)
100% of setting  0.05Hz (setting:  rated frequency + 5.00Hz)
100% of setting  0.05Hz/s (setting:  5.00Hz/s)
IEC60255-127, 5% or 30ms
(OV; 1.2  G/Gs  GD/Gs , UV; 0  G/Gs  1)
OV Definite Operate Time;
DTL + 45ms (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)
UV Definite Operate Time;
DTL + 45ms (DT, input:  80% of setting)
ZPS Definite Operate Time;
DTL + 45ms (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)
NPS Definite Operate Time;
DTL + 50ms (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)
Under/Over Frequency Operate Time
DTL + 80-200ms (rated frequency: 50Hz)
GD = 300V
DTL + 70-170ms (rated frequency: 60Hz)
Frequency rate-of-change Operate Time
190-300ms (rated frequency: 50Hz, input: ≥ 200% of setting)
160-250ms (rated frequency: 60Hz, input: ≥ 200% of setting)
Time delays includes operating time of trip contacts
Front Communication port - local PC (USB2.0)
Connector type:
Cable length:
USB-Type B
5m (max.)
Rear Communication port - remote PC (RS485)
Connection:
Cable type:
Cable length:
Multidrop (max. 32 relays)
Twisted pair
1200m (max.)
 181 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Connector:
Isolation:
Transmission rate:
Screw terminals
1kVac for 1 min.
19.2 kbps
Rear Communication port (Ethernet)
100BASE-TX
RJ-45 connector
100BASE-FX
SC connector
Binary Inputs
Operating voltage
For signal detection
Typical 154Vdc (min. 110Vdc) for 220Vdc rating
Typical 77Vdc (min. 70Vdc) for 110Vdc rating
Typical 33.6Vdc (min. 24Vdc) for 48Vdc rating
Typical 16.8Vdc(min. 12Vdc) for 24Vdc rating
For trip circuit supervision
≥88V for 220/250Vdc rating
≥38.4Vdc for 110Vdc rating
≥19.2V for 48Vdc rating
≥9.6V for 24Vdc rating
Binary Outputs
Number
Ratings
4 or 8 (excluding Relay Fail contact)
Make and carry: 5A continuously
model 410 and 411; BO#1 and #2
Make and carry: 30A, 250Vdc for 0.5s (L/R40ms)
model 412: BO#1,#2,#5 and #6
Break: 0.1A, 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
other BOs
Make and carry: 4A continuously
Make and carry: 8A, 250Vdc for 0.2s (L/R40ms)
Break: 0.1A, 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Durability:
Loaded contact: 1,000 operations
Unloaded contact: 10,000 operations
Pickup time:
Less than 15ms
Reset time:
Less than 10ms
Mechanical design
Weight
1.5kg for model 410A and 411A
Width
1.8kg for model 412A
149mm for model 410A and 411A
Height
223mm for model 412A
177mm
Depth
168mm
Case color
Installation
Munsell No. 10YR8/0.5
Flush mounting with attachment kits
 182 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE
Test
Standards
Details
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1/2
IEC 60068-2-30
Operating range: -20C to +60C.
Humidity
IEC 60068-2-78
56 days at 40C and 93% relative humidity.
Enclosure Protection
IEC 60529
IP52 (front), IP20 (rear), IP40 (top)
Storage / Transit: -25C to +70C.
Mechanical Environment
Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1
Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump
IEC 60255-21-2
Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic
IEC 60255-21-3
Class 1
Dielectric Withstand
IEC 60255-5
IEEE C37.90.0
2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.
High Voltage Impulse
IEC 60255-5
Three positive and three negative impulses of
5kV(peak) for CT, Power Supply Unit (PSU), BI and BO
circuits; between terminals and earth, and between
independent circuits
3kV (peak) for RS485 circuit; between terminals and earth
3kV (peak) for BO circuit; across normally open contacts
Electrical Environment
1.2/50s, 0.5J between all terminals and between all terminals
and earth.
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency
Disturbance / Damped
Oscillatory Wave
IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3,
IEC 61000-4-12
IEEE C37.90.1
1MHz 2.5kV to 3kV (peak) applied to all ports in common mode.
1MHz 1.0kV applied to all ports in differential mode.
Electrostatic
Discharge
IEC 60255-22-2 Class 3,
IEC 61000-4-2
6kV contact discharge, 8kV air discharge.
Radiated RF
Electromagnetic
Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-3 Class 3,
IEC 61000-4-3
Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to 1GHz
and 1.7GHz to 2.2GHz. Additional spot tests at 80, 160, 450,
900 and 1890MHz.
Fast Transient
Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-4 Class A,
IEC 61000-4-4,
IEEE C37.90.1
4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns applied to all inputs.
Surge Immunity
IEC 60255-22-5,
IEC 61000-4-5
1.2/50s surge in common/differential modes:
HV, PSU and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV (peak)
RS485 port: 1kV (peak)
Conducted RF
Electromagnetic
Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-6 Class 3,
IEC 61000-4-6
10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz.
Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.
Power Frequency
Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-7 Class A,
IEC 61000-4-16
300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode.
150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode.
Not applicable to AC inputs.
Conducted and
IEC 60255-25,
Conducted emissions:
 183 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Test
Radiated Emissions
Standards
EN 55022 Class A,
IEC 61000-6-4
Details
0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean)
0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions (at 10m):
30 to 230MHz: <40dB
230 to 1000MHz: <47dB
European Commission Directives
89/336/EEC
73/23/EEC
Compliance with the European Commission Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive is demonstrated according to generic
EMC standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4.
Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage
Directive is demonstrated according to product safety standard
EN 60255-27.
 184 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix K
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic
 185 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
The symbols used in the scheme logic and their respective meanings are as follows:
Signal names
Marked with
: Measuring element output signal
Marked with
: Binary signal input from or output to external equipment
Marked with [
]
Marked with "
"
Unmarked
:
Scheme switch
:
Scheme switch position
: Internal scheme logic signal
AND gates
A
B
A
1
B
C
1
1
Other cases
Output
1
0
A
1
B
C
1
0
Other cases
Output
1
0
A
1
B
C
0
0
Other cases
Output
1
0
&
Output
&
Output
&
Output
1
Output
A
0
B
C
0
0
Other cases
Output
0
1
1
Output
A
0
B
C
0
1
Other cases
Output
0
1
1
Output
A
0
B
C
1
1
Other cases
Output
0
1
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
OR gates
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
 186 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Signal inversion
A
1
A
0
1
Output
Output
1
0
Timer
t
Delayed pick-up timer with fixed setting
0
XXX:
Set time
XXX
0
Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting
t
XXX:
Set time
XXX
t
Delayed pick-up timer with variable setting
0
XXX - YYY: Setting range
XXX - YYY
0
Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting
t
XXX - YYY: Setting range
XXX - YYY
One-shot timer
A
A
Output
Output
XXX - YYY
XXX - YYY: Setting range
Flip-flop
S
0
1
0
1
S
F/F
Output
R
R
0
0
1
1
Output
No change
1
0
0
Scheme switch
A
Output
ON

Output
ON
 187 
A
Switch
1
ON
Other cases
Switch
ON
OFF
Output
1
0
Output
1
0
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix L
Modbus: Interoperability
 188 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Modbus: Interoperability
1. Physical and Data Link Layer
- RS485(EIA/TIA-485) 2-wire interface
- RTU mode only
- Coding System:
8–bit binary (1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, 1 stop bit)
Even parity
- Address setting range: 1-247
- Baud rate setting range: 9600 or 19200
2. Application Layer
(1) Modbus response format
FC
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
16
17
43
Description
Read Coils
Read Discrete Inputs
Read Holding Registers
Read Input Register
Write Single Coil
Write Single Register
Read Exception status
Diagnostic
Write Multiple Registers
Report Slave ID
Read device Identification (SC:14)
Supplementary explanation
Returns remote control enable flag
Returns BIs or LED lamp status, etc.
Returns value of analog inputs
Remote command and Time synchronization
Need to specify record number
Returns relay and CB status
Current time setting, etc.
Returns device ID
Returns device information
For FC=01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06 and 16, the response format is the same as described in "MODBUS
Application Protocol Specification V1.1b".
For other FCs, the response format is as following:
07 Read Exception status
Response Data
Output Data (1byte)
bit Description
0 IN SERVICE (LED)
1 TRIP (LED)
2 ALARM (LED)
3 RELAY FAIL (LED)
4 CB CLOSED (LED)
5 CB OPEN (LED)
6 Relay fail output (BO)
7 <Reserved>
 189 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
08 Diagnostic
Response Data
SC
Response Data Field
00
Echo Request Data (2Bytes)
01
<not supported>
02
Diagnostic Register Contents (2Bytes)
bit0 IN SERVICE (LED)
bit1 TRIP (LED)
bit2 ALARM (LED)
bit3 RELAY FAIL (LED)
bit4 <Reserved>
bit5 <Reserved>
bit6 <Reserved>
bit7 <Reserved>
bit8 3-phase current balance alarm
bit9 CB contact status alarm
bit10 CB operation number alarm
bit11 <Reserved>
bit12 V0 error alarm
bit13 V2 error alarm
bit14 <Reserved>
bit15 <Reserved>
03<not supported>
17 Report Slave ID
Response Data
Byte Count (1byte)
Slave ID (17bytes)
GRE120-401A-00-10
Run Indicator Status (1byte)
Return Diagnostic Register
18bytes
Relay type and model ID
ASCII
0x00=out of service, 0xFF=in service
43 Read Device Identification (SC:14)
Response Data
Param OID
01
00
TOSHIBA
01
GRE130-411
02
A
02
03
<Non>
04
GRE120
05
411A-10-10
06
Overvoltage Relay
07<Reserved>
03
80
<SPACE>
81
GS1EM1-03-A
04
Description
Return Query Data
Basic device identification
Vendor Name
Product Code
Major Minor Revision
Regular device identification
Vendor URL
Product Name
Model Name
User Application Name
Reserved
Extended device identification
Software version
One specific identification
object
<not supported>
 190 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
(2) Modbus address map group
Modbus data model Address(ID)
Coils
0x0200
(Read/Write)
0x0400
Discrete Input
(Read Only)
0x1000
0x1016
0x1040
0x1080
0x1201
Input Registers
0x2000
(Read Only)
0x2800
Holding Registers
0x3000
(Read/Write)
0x3200
Number Data specification
1 Remote control (enable flag)
Remote control (command, interlock), Time
4
synchronization, Clear command
6 BI
5 Relay fail output, BO
14 LED(Relay status, R/L, CB on/off status)
16 Virtual LED
Signal list (see Appendix A for detail)
－
Analog data (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca, V0 etc., not
40 converted to engineering units)
2-word long
Analog data (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca, V0 etc.,
40 converted to engineering units)
2-word long
Fault record (No., Time, Phase, Type), max. 4 records,
29
write protected
Event record (No., Time, ID, Status), 10 out of max. 200
72
records, write protected
4 Current time data (IEC format)
30 Counter data (number of trips etc), 2-word long
2 Password for remote control
Setting value (see Appendix H for detail), Read Only
－
Undefined after this address
0x3800
0x3810
0x3E82
0x4000
0x8000
Discrete Input
Coils
Input Registers
Holding Registers
Single bit
Single bit
16-bit word
16-bit word
(3)Modbus address map
Address
Description
Read-Only
Read-Write
Read-Only
Read-Write
Supplementary explanation
Coils
0200
0400
0401
0402
0403
Remote control (R/W)
Remote control enable flag
Remote control command
Remote interlock command
Remote reset command
Time synchronization
command
Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on/off)
Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on/off)
Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on)
Call time synchronization task (on)
 191 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Address
Description
Discrete Input
BI status (R)
1000
BI1
1001
BI2
1002
BI3
1003
BI4
1004
BI5
1005
BI6
BO status (R)
1016
Relay fail output
1017
BO1
1018
BO2
1019
BO3
101A
BO4
101B
BO5
101C
BO6
101D
BO7
101E
BO8
LED lamp status (R)
1040
IN SERVICE
1041
TRIP
1042
ALARM
1043
RELAY FAIL
1044
CB CLOSED
1045
CB OPEN
1046
LOCAL
1047
REMOTE
1048
LED1
1049
LED2
104A
LED3
104B
LED4
104C
LED5
104D
LED6
Virtual LED status (R)
1080
IND1 BIT1
1081
IND1 BIT2
1082
IND1 BIT3
1083
IND1 BIT4
1084
IND1 BIT5
1085
IND1 BIT6
1086
IND1 BIT7
1087
IND1 BIT8
1088
IND2 BIT1
1089
IND2 BIT2
108A
IND2 BIT3
108B
IND2 BIT4
108C
IND2 BIT5
108D
IND2 BIT6
108E
IND2 BIT7
108F
IND2 BIT8
Supplementary explanation
Only for GRE130-411A
Only for GRE130-411A
Only for GRE130-411A
Only for GRE130-411A
Only for GRE130-412A
Only for GRE130-412A
Only for GRE130-412A
Only for GRE130-412A
 192 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Address
1201
1202
…
Description
Signal list (R)
Signal No.1
Signal No.2
Signal No.n
Address
Description
Input Registers
Analog data (R)
2000
Van / Vab / Vph (H)
2001
Van / Vab / Vph (L)
2002
Van / Vab (H)
2003
Van / Vab (L)
2004
Vbn / Vbc (H)
2005
Vbn / Vbc (L)
2006
Vbn / Vbc (H)
2007
Vbn / Vbc (L)
2008
Vcn / Vca (H)
2009
Vcn / Vca (L)
200A
Vcn / Vca (H)
200B
Vcn / Vca (L)
200C
V0 (H)
200D
V0 (L)
200E
V0 (H)
200F
V0 (L)
2010
V2 (H)
2011
V2 (L)
2012
V2 (H)
2013
V2 (L)
2014
V1 (H)
2015
V1 (L)
2016
V1 (H)
2017
V1 (L)
2018
<Reserved>
2019
<Reserved>
201A
<Reserved>
201B
<Reserved>
201C
<Reserved>
201D
<Reserved>
201E
<Reserved>
201F
<Reserved>
2020
<Reserved>
2021
<Reserved>
2022
<Reserved>
2023
<Reserved>
2024
<Reserved>
2025
<Reserved>
Supplementary explanation
See Appendix A
See Appendix A
Address for signal No.n = 0x1200 + n.
See Appendix A
Supplementary explanation
Followings are NOT converted to engineering units.
Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)
Secondary: Value×0.125(V)
Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)
Secondary: Value×0.125(V)
Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)
Secondary: Value×0.125(V)
Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)
Secondary: Value×0.125(V)
Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)
Secondary: Value×0.125(V)
Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)
Secondary: Value×0.125(V)
Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
 193 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Address
Description
Supplementary explanation
2026
2027
2028
2029
202A
202B
202C
202D
202E
202F
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2037
f (H)
f (L)
fmax (H)
fmax (L)
fmin (H)
fmin (L)
df / dt (H)
df / dt (L)
df / dtx (H)
df / dtx (L)
df / dtn (H)
df / dtn (L)
<Reserved>
<Reserved>
<Reserved>
<Reserved>
<Reserved>
<Reserved>
f × 0.01 (Hz)
Address
Description
Supplementary explanation
Analog data (R)
The following are converted to engineering units.
(the same as the displayed value)
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
280A
280B
280C
280D
280E
280F
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816
2817
f × 0.01 (Hz)
f × 0.01 (Hz)
f × 0.01 (Hz)
f × 0.01 (Hz)
f × 0.01 (Hz)
Van (H)
Van (L)
Van (H)
Van (L)
Vbn (H)
Vbn (L)
Vbn (H)
Vbn (L)
Vcn (H)
Vcn (L)
Vcn (H)
Vcn (L)
Vab (H)
Vab (L)
Vab (H)
Vab (L)
Vbc (H)
Vbc (L)
Vbc (H)
Vbc (L)
Vca (H)
Vca (L)
Vca (H)
Vca (L)
 194 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Address
2818
2819
281A
281B
281C
281D
281E
281F
2820
2821
2822
2823
2824
2825
2826
2827
2828
2829
282A
282B
282C
282D
282E
282F
2830
2831
2832
2833
2834
2835
2836
2837
Description
Vph (H)
Vph (L)
V0 (H)
V0 (L)
V0 (H)
V0 (L)
V1 (H)
V1 (L)
V1 (H)
V1 (L)
V2 (H)
V2 (L)
V2 (H)
V2 (L)
f (H)
f (L)
fmax (H)
fmax (L)
fmin (H)
fmin (L)
df / dt (H)
df / dt (L)
df / dtx (H)
df / dtx (L)
df / dtn (H)
df / dtn (L)
<Reserved>
<Reserved>
<Reserved>
<Reserved>
<Reserved>
<Reserved>
Supplementary explanation
 195 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Address
Description
Holding Registers
Fault record (R)
3000
records count
3001
No.1
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Fault phase
Trip mode
3008
No.2
3009
300A
300B
300C
300D
300E
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Fault phase
Trip mode
300F
No.3
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Fault phase
Trip mode
3016
No.4
3017
3018
3019
301A
301B
301C
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Fault phase
Trip mode
Supplementary explanation
Number of record saved (max. 4)
Indication of record #1. If no data, all of the following data is
set to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
Indication of record #2. If no data, all of the following data is
set to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
Indication of record #3. If no data, all of the following data is
set to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
Indication of record #4. If no data, all of the following data is
set to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
 196 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Address
Description
Supplementary explanation
3200
Event record (R)
records count
3201
set No. (R/W)
3202
No. X
3203
3204
3205
3206
3207
3208
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
3209
No.X+1
320A
320B
320C
320D
320E
320F
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
3210
No.X+2
3211
3212
3213
3214
3215
3216
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
3217
No.X+3
3218
3219
321A
321B
321C
321D
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
321E
No.X+4
321F
3220
3221
3222
3223
3224
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
10 records are obtained at a time.
Number of records saved (max. 200)
Requesting first record number (If 1, returns the latest 10
records)
Returns "Set No.". If no data, all of the following data is set to
0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix B
1:on 、2:off、
Returns "Set No.+1". If no data, all of the following data is
set to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix B
1:on 、2:off
Returns "Set No.+2". If no data, all of the following data is
set to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix B
1:on 、2:off
Returns "Set No.+3". If no data, all of the following data is
set to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix B
1:on 、2:off
Returns "Set No.+4". If no data, all of the following data is
set to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix B
1:on 、2:off
 197 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Address
Description
3225
No.X+5
3226
3227
3228
3229
322A
322B
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
322C
No.X+6
322D
322E
322F
3230
3231
3232
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
3233
No.X+7
3234
3235
3236
3237
3238
3239
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
323A
No.X+8
323B
323C
323D
323E
323F
3240
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
3241
No.X+9
3242
3243
3244
3245
3246
3247
milliseconds
hours/minutes
months/days
year
Event ID
Action
Supplementary explanation
Returns "Set No.+5". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix B
1:on 、2:off
Returns "Set No.+6". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix B
1:on 、2:off
Returns "Set No.+7". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix B
1:on 、2:off
Returns "Set No.+8". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix B
1:on 、2:off
Returns "Set No.+9". If no data, all of the following data is set
to 0.
0-59999 (millisecond)
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
0-99(y)
See Appendix B
1:on 、2:off
 198 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Address
3800
3801
3802
3803
3810
3811
3812
3813
3814
3815
3816
3817
3E82
3E83
4000
7FFF
Description
Supplementary explanation
Current time in IEC60870-5-4 format
Current time data (R/W)
milliseconds
0-59999 (millisecond)
hours/minutes
0-23(h)、0-59(m)
months/days
1-12(m)、1-31(d)
year
0-99(y)
Counters (R/W)
Trips Phase-A (H)
Can be set to an initial value.
Trips Phase-A (L)
Trips Phase-B (H)
Can be set to an initial value.
Trips Phase-B (L)
Trips Phase-C (H)
Can be set to an initial value.
Trips Phase-C (L)
Trips any phase (H)
Can be set to an initial value.
Trips any phase (L)
Password
Control (H)
Password for remote control (in ASCII code)
Control (L)
Setting values
See the next table for setting values.
<Reserved>
 199 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
(4) Modbus address for setting values
Setting Group
(Menu)
Event Record
Disturbance
Record
Address
6034
6035
6036
6037
6038
6039
603C
6000
6001
6002
6003
6004
6005
6006
6007
6008
6009
600A
603D
600B
600C
600D
600E
600F
6010
6011
6012
6013
6014
6015
6016
6017
6018
6019
601A
601B
601C
601D
601E
601F
6020
6021
6022
6023
6024
6025
6026
6027
6028
6029
602A
Name
Contents
BI1 comm.
BI2 comm.
BI3 comm.
BI4 comm.
BI5 comm.
BI6 comm.
Time1
Time2
OV
UV
ZPS
NPS
Trip
BI
OV
UV
ZPS
NPS
FRQ
SIG1
SIG2
SIG3
SIG4
SIG5
SIG6
SIG7
SIG8
SIG9
SIG10
SIG11
SIG12
SIG13
SIG14
SIG15
SIG16
SIG17
SIG18
SIG19
SIG20
SIG21
SIG22
SIG23
SIG24
SIG25
SIG26
SIG27
SIG28
SIG29
SIG30
SIG31
SIG32
BI 1 command trigger setting
BI 2 command trigger setting
BI 3 command trigger setting
BI 4 command trigger setting
BI 5 command trigger setting
BI 6 command trigger setting
Disturbance record period before fault
Disturbance record period after fault
OC element for disturbance
EF element for disturbance
SEF element for disturbance
NPS element for disturbance
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
Disturbance trigger
 200 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
Counter
Status
Binary Input
Address
602B
602C
602D
6030
6400
6401
6C00
6C01
6C02
6C03
6C04
6C05
6C06
6C07
6C08
6C09
6C0A
6C0B
6C0C
6C0D
6C0E
6C0F
6C10
6C11
6C12
6C13
6C14
6C15
6C16
6C17
6C18
6C19
6C1A
6C1B
6C1C
6C1D
6C1E
6C1F
6C20
6C21
6C22
6C23
6C24
6C25
6C26
6C27
6C28
6C29
6C2A
6C2B
6C2C
Name
TCSPEN
CBSMEN
TCAEN
TCALM
Display
Time sync.
BITHR1
BITHR2
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI1
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
Contents
BI1PUD
BI1DOD
BI1SNS
BI1SGS
OV1BLK
OV2BLK
OV3BLK
UV1BLK
UV2BLK
UV3BLK
ZP1BLK
ZP2BLK
NP1BLK
NP2BLK
TCFALM
CBOPN
CBCLS
EXT3PH
EXTAPH
EXTBPH
EXTCPH
RMTRST
SYNCLK
STORCD
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
RMTOPN
RMTCLS
CNTLCK
FRQ1BLK
FRQ2BLK
FRQ3BLK
FRQ4BLK
BI2PUD
BI2DOD
BI2SNS
BI2SGS
OV1BLK
OV2BLK
OV3BLK
UV1BLK
 201 
Trip Circuit Supervision Enable
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Alarm Enable
Trip Count Alarm Enable
Trip Count Alarm Threshold setting
Metering
Time synchronization method
BI threshold for BI1 & BI2
BI threshold for BI3-6
Binary Input 1 Pick-up delay
Binary Input 1 Drop-off delay
Binary Input 1 Sense
Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select
OV1 Block
OV2 Block
OV3 Block
UV1 Block
UV2 Block
UV3 Block
ZPS1 Block
ZPS2 Block
NPS1 Block
NPS2 Block
Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
Circuit Breaker Open
Circuit Breaker Close
External Trip - 3 phase
External Trip - A phase
External Trip - B phase
External Trip - C phase
Remote Reset
Synchronize clock
Store Disturbance Record
Alarm screen 1.
Alarm screen 2.
Alarm screen 3.
Alarm screen 4.
Remote CB Open Control
Remote CB Close Control
Interlock Input
FRQ1 Block
FRQ2 Block
FRQ3 Block
FRQ4 Block
Binary Input 2 Pick-up delay
Binary Input 2 Drop-off delay
Binary Input 2 Sense
Binary Input 2 Settings Group Select
OV1 Block
OV2 Block
OV3 Block
UV1 Block
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
Address
6C2D
6C2E
6C2F
6C30
6C31
6C32
6C33
6C34
6C35
6C36
6C37
6C38
6C39
6C3A
6C3B
6C3C
6C3D
6C3E
6C3F
6C40
6C41
6C42
6C43
6C44
6C45
6C46
6C47
6C48
6C49
6C4A
6C4B
6C4C
6C4D
6C4E
6C4F
6C50
6C51
6C52
6C53
6C54
6C55
6C56
6C57
6C58
6C59
6C5A
6C5B
6C5C
6C5D
6C5E
6C5F
Name
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI2
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
UV3BLK
UV2BLK
UV3BLK
ZP1BLK
ZP2BLK
NP1BLK
NP2BLK
TCFALM
CBOPN
CBCLS
EXT3PH
EXTAPH
EXTBPH
EXTCPH
RMTRST
SYNCLK
STORCD
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
RMTOPN
RMTCLS
CNTLCK
FRQ1BLK
FRQ2BLK
FRQ3BLK
FRQ4BLK
BI3PUD
BI3DOD
BI3SNS
BI3SGS
OV1BLK
OV2BLK
OV3BLK
UV1BLK
UV2BLK
UV3BLK
ZP1BLK
ZP2BLK
NP1BLK
NP2BLK
TCFALM
CBOPN
CBCLS
EXT3PH
EXTAPH
EXTBPH
EXTCPH
RMTRST
SYNCLK
STORCD
 202 
UV2 Block
UV3 Block
ZPS1 Block
ZPS2 Block
NPS1 Block
NPS2 Block
Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
Circuit Breaker Open
Circuit Breaker Close
External Trip - 3 phase
External Trip - A phase
External Trip - B phase
External Trip - C phase
Remote Reset
Synchronize clock
Store Disturbance Record
Alarm screen 1.
Alarm screen 2.
Alarm screen 3.
Alarm screen 4.
Remote CB Open Control
Remote CB Close Control
Interlock Input
FRQ1 Block
FRQ2 Block
FRQ3 Block
FRQ4 Block
Binary Input 3 Pick-up delay
Binary Input 3 Drop-off delay
Binary Input 3 Sense
Binary Input 3 Settings Group Select
OV1 Block
OV2 Block
OV3 Block
UV1 Block
UV2 Block
UV3 Block
ZPS1 Block
ZPS2 Block
NPS1 Block
NPS2 Block
Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
Circuit Breaker Open
Circuit Breaker Close
External Trip - 3 phase
External Trip - A phase
External Trip - B phase
External Trip - C phase
Remote Reset
Synchronize clock
Store Disturbance Record
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
Binary Input
Address
6C60
6C61
6C62
6C63
6C64
6C65
6C66
6C67
6C68
6C69
6C6A
6C6B
6C6C
6C6D
6C6E
6C6F
6C70
6C71
6C72
6C73
6C74
6C75
6C76
6C77
6C78
6C79
6C7A
6C7B
6C7C
6C7D
6C7E
6C7F
6C80
6C81
6C82
6C83
6C84
6C85
6C86
6C87
6C88
6C89
6C8A
6C8B
6C8C
6C8D
6C8E
6C8F
Name
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI3
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI4
BI5
BI5
Contents
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
RMTOPN
RMTCLS
CNTLCK
FRQ1BLK
FRQ2BLK
FRQ3BLK
FRQ4BLK
BI4PUD
BI4DOD
BI4SNS
BI4SGS
OV1BLK
OV2BLK
OV3BLK
UV1BLK
UV2BLK
UV3BLK
ZP1BLK
ZP2BLK
NP1BLK
NP2BLK
TCFALM
CBOPN
CBCLS
EXT3PH
EXTAPH
EXTBPH
EXTCPH
RMTRST
SYNCLK
STORCD
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
RMTOPN
RMTCLS
CNTLCK
FRQ1BLK
FRQ2BLK
FRQ3BLK
FRQ4BLK
BI5PUD
BI5DOD
 203 
Alarm screen 1.
Alarm screen 2.
Alarm screen 3.
Alarm screen 4.
Remote CB Open Control
Remote CB Close Control
Interlock Input
FRQ1 Block
FRQ2 Block
FRQ3 Block
FRQ4 Block
Binary Input 4 Pick-up delay
Binary Input 4 Drop-off delay
Binary Input 4 Sense
Binary Input 4 Settings Group Select
OV1 Block
OV2 Block
OV3 Block
UV1 Block
UV2 Block
UV3 Block
ZPS1 Block
ZPS2 Block
NPS1 Block
NPS2 Block
Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
Circuit Breaker Open
Circuit Breaker Close
External Trip - 3 phase
External Trip - A phase
External Trip - B phase
External Trip - C phase
Remote Reset
Synchronize clock
Store Disturbance Record
Alarm screen 1.
Alarm screen 2.
Alarm screen 3.
Alarm screen 4.
Remote CB Open Control
Remote CB Close Control
Interlock Input
FRQ1 Block
FRQ2 Block
FRQ3 Block
FRQ4 Block
Binary Input 5 Pick-up delay
Binary Input 5 Drop-off delay
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
Binary Input
Address
6C90
6C91
6C92
6C93
6C94
6C95
6C96
6C97
6C98
6C99
6C9A
6C9B
6C9C
6C9D
6C9E
6C9F
6CA0
6CA1
6CA2
6CA3
6CA4
6CA5
6CA6
6CA7
6CA8
6CA9
6CAA
6CAB
6CAC
6CAD
6CAE
6CAF
6CB0
6CB1
6CB2
6CB3
6CB4
6CB5
6CB6
6CB7
6CB8
6CB9
6CBA
6CBB
6CBC
6CBD
6CBE
6CBF
Name
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI5
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
Contents
BI5SNS
BI5SGS
OV1BLK
OV2BLK
OV3BLK
UV1BLK
UV2BLK
UV3BLK
ZP1BLK
ZP2BLK
NP1BLK
NP2BLK
TCFALM
CBOPN
CBCLS
EXT3PH
EXTAPH
EXTBPH
EXTCPH
RMTRST
SYNCLK
STORCD
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
RMTOPN
RMTCLS
CNTLCK
FRQ1BLK
FRQ2BLK
FRQ3BLK
FRQ4BLK
BI6PUD
BI6DOD
BI6SNS
BI6SGS
OV1BLK
OV2BLK
OV3BLK
UV1BLK
UV2BLK
UV3BLK
ZP1BLK
ZP2BLK
NP1BLK
NP2BLK
TCFALM
 204 
Binary Input 5 Sense
Binary Input 5 Settings Group Select
OV1 Block
OV2 Block
OV3 Block
UV1 Block
UV2 Block
UV3 Block
ZPS1 Block
ZPS2 Block
NPS1 Block
NPS2 Block
Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
Circuit Breaker Open
Circuit Breaker Close
External Trip - 3 phase
External Trip - A phase
External Trip - B phase
External Trip - C phase
Remote Reset
Synchronize clock
Store Disturbance Record
Alarm screen 1.
Alarm screen 2.
Alarm screen 3.
Alarm screen 4.
Remote CB Open Control
Remote CB Close Control
Interlock Input
FRQ1 Block
FRQ2 Block
FRQ3 Block
FRQ4 Block
Binary Input 6 Pick-up delay
Binary Input 6 Drop-off delay
Binary Input 6 Sense
Binary Input 6 Settings Group Select
OV1 Block
OV2 Block
OV3 Block
UV1 Block
UV2 Block
UV3 Block
ZPS1 Block
ZPS2 Block
NPS1 Block
NPS2 Block
Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
Binary Input
Address
6CC0
6CC1
6CC2
6CC3
6CC4
6CC5
6CC6
6CC7
6CC8
6CC9
6CCA
6CCB
6CCC
6CCD
6CCE
6CCF
6CD0
6CD1
6CD2
6CD3
Name
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
BI6
Contents
CBOPN
CBCLS
EXT3PH
EXTAPH
EXTBPH
EXTCPH
RMTRST
SYNCLK
STORCD
Alarm1
Alarm2
Alarm3
Alarm4
RMTOPN
RMTCLS
CNTLCK
FRQ1BLK
FRQ2BLK
FRQ3BLK
FRQ4BLK
 205 
Circuit Breaker Open
Circuit Breaker Close
External Trip - 3 phase
External Trip - A phase
External Trip - B phase
External Trip - C phase
Remote Reset
Synchronize clock
Store Disturbance Record
Alarm screen 1.
Alarm screen 2.
Alarm screen 3.
Alarm screen 4.
Remote CB Open Control
Remote CB Close Control
Interlock Input
FRQ1 Block
FRQ2 Block
FRQ3 Block
FRQ4 Block
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
Binary Output
Address
7428
7429
7400
7401
7402
7403
7450
742A
742B
7404
7405
7406
7407
7451
742C
742D
7408
7409
740A
740B
7452
742E
742F
740C
740D
740E
740F
7453
Name
BO1
BO1
BO1
BO1
BO1
BO1
BO1
BO2
BO2
BO2
BO2
BO2
BO2
BO2
BO3
BO3
BO3
BO3
BO3
BO3
BO3
BO4
BO4
BO4
BO4
BO4
BO4
BO4
Contents
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
TBO
 206 
Logic Gate Type
Reset operation
Functions
Functions
Functions
Functions
Delay/Pulse Width
Logic Gate Type
Reset operation
Functions
Functions
Functions
Functions
Delay/Pulse Width
Logic Gate Type
Reset operation
Functions
Functions
Functions
Functions
Delay/Pulse Width
Logic Gate Type
Reset operation
Functions
Functions
Functions
Functions
Delay/Pulse Width
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
Address
Configurable LED
7020
7021
7022
7023
7024
7025
7026
7027
7028
7029
702A
702B
7000
7001
7002
7003
7004
7005
7006
7007
7008
7009
700A
700B
700C
700D
700E
700F
7010
7011
7012
7013
7014
7015
7016
7017
7060
7061
7062
7063
7064
7065
7066
7050
7051
7030
7031
7032
7033
7034
7035
7036
7037
Name
LED1
LED1
LED2
LED2
LED3
LED3
LED4
LED4
LED5
LED5
LED6
LED7
LED1
LED1
LED1
LED1
LED2
LED2
LED2
LED2
LED3
LED3
LED3
LED3
LED4
LED4
LED4
LED4
LED5
LED5
LED5
LED5
LED6
LED6
LED6
LED6
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
LED6
CB CLOSED
IND1 Reset
IND2 Reset
IND1
IND1
IND1
IND1
IND1
IND1
IND1
IND1
Contents
Logic
Reset
Logic
Reset
Logic
Reset
Logic
Reset
Logic
Reset
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
Color
Color
Color
Color
Color
Color
Color
BIT1
BIT2
BIT3
BIT4
BIT5
BIT6
BIT7
BIT8
 207 
LED1 Logic Gate Type
LED1 Reset operation
LED2 Logic Gate Type
LED2 Reset operation
LED3 Logic Gate Type
LED3 Reset operation
LED4 Logic Gate Type
LED4 Reset operation
LED5 Logic Gate Type
LED5 Reset operation
LED6 Logic Gate Type
LED6 Reset operation
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Functions
LED Color
LED Color
LED Color
LED Color
LED Color
LED Color
LED Color
IND1 Reset operation
IND1 Reset operation
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
Configurable LED
Active group/
Common
Address
7038
7039
703A
703B
703C
703D
703E
703F
6800
6803
6804
6805
6806
6807
Name
IND2
IND2
IND2
IND2
IND2
IND2
IND2
IND2
Active gp.
AOLED
Control
Interlock
Control Kind
Frequency
Contents
BIT1
BIT2
BIT3
BIT4
BIT5
BIT6
BIT7
BIT8
 208 
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Virtual LED
Active setting group
ALARM LED light control for alarm output
Control enable
Interlock enable
Control Hierarchy (if Control = Enable)
Frequency
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
Protection
Address
4C00
4C01
4017
4000
4001
4002
4003
4004
4005
4006
4007
4008
4009
400A
400B
400C
400D
400E
400F
4010
4011
4012
4013
4014
4015
4016
4800
4803
4400
4804
4805
4801
4816
4401
4817
4806
4802
4402
4807
4818
4819
481A
481B
481C
481D
Name
PVT
RVT
SVCNT
OV
OV
OV
UV
UV
UV
UV
ZPS
ZPS
NPS
NPS
FRQ1
FRQ1
FRQ1
FRQ2
FRQ2
FRQ2
FRQ3
FRQ3
FRQ3
FRQ4
FRQ4
FRQ4
OV
OV
OV
OV
OV
OV
OV
OV
OV
OV
OV
OV
OV
OV
OV
OV
OV
OV
OV
Contents
OV1EN
OV2EN
OV3EN
UV1EN
UV2EN
UV3EN
VBLK
ZPS1EN
ZPS2EN
NPS1EN
NPS2EN
FT1
DFT1
Logic1
FT2
DFT2
Logic2
FT3
DFT3
Logic3
FT4
DFT4
Logic4
OV1
TOV1
TOV1
TOV1R
OV1DPR
OV2
TOV2
TOV2
TOV2R
OV2DPR
OV3
TOV3
OV3DPR
OV1-k
OV1-α
OV1-C
OV2-k
OV2-α
OV2-C
 209 
VT ratio
Residual VT ratio
AC input imbalance
OV1 Enable
OV2 Enable
OV3 Enable
UV1 Enable
UV2 Enable
UV3 Enable
UVBLOCK Enable
ZPS1 Enable
ZPS2 Enable
NPS1 Enable
NPS2 Enable
FRQ1 Enable / Type
DFRQ1 Enable / Type
FRQ1 Logic
FRQ2 Enable / Type
DFRQ2 Enable / Type
FRQ2 Logic
FRQ3 Enable / Type
DFRQ3 Enable / Type
FRQ3 Logic
FRQ4 Enable / Type
DFRQ4 Enable / Type
FRQ4 Logic
OV1 Threshold setting
OV1 Time multiplier setting
OV1 Definite time setting
OV1 Definite time reset delay
OV1 DO/PU ratio
OV2 Threshold setting
OV2 Time multiplier setting
OV2 Definite time setting
OV2 Definite time reset delay
OV2 DO/PU ratio
OV3 Threshold setting
OV3 Definite time setting
OV3 DO/PU ratio
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
Protection
Address
4808
480B
4403
480C
4809
481E
4404
481F
480A
4405
480D
4820
4821
4822
4823
4824
4825
480E
4810
4406
4811
480F
4826
4407
4827
4828
4829
482A
482B
482C
482D
4812
4814
4408
4815
4813
482E
4409
482F
4830
4831
4832
4833
4834
4835
Name
UV
UV
UV
UV
UV
UV
UV
UV
UV
UV
UV
UV
UV
UV
UV
UV
UV
ZPS
ZPS
ZPS
ZPS
ZPS
ZPS
ZPS
ZPS
ZPS
ZPS
ZPS
ZPS
ZPS
ZPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
Contents
UV1
TUV1
TUV1
TUV1R
UV2
TUV2
TUV2
TUV2R
UV3
TUV3
VBLK
UV1-k
UV1-α
UV1-C
UV2-k
UV2-α
UV2-C
ZPS1
TZPS1
TZPS1
TZPS1R
ZPS2
TZPS2
TZPS2
TZPS2R
ZPS 1-k
ZPS 1-α
ZPS 1-C
ZPS 2-k
ZPS 2-α
ZPS 2-C
NPS1
TNPS1
TNPS1
TNPS1R
NPS2
TNPS2
TNPS2
TNPS2R
NPS 1-k
NPS 1-α
NPS 1-C
NPS 2-k
NPS 2-α
NPS 2-C
 210 
UV1 Threshold setting
UV1 Time multiplier setting
UV1 Definite time setting
UV1 Definite time reset delay
UV2 Threshold setting
UV2 Time multiplier setting
UV2 Definite time setting
UV2 Definite time reset delay
UV2 Threshold setting
UV3 Definite time setting
UV Block Threshold setting
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2
ZPS1 Threshold setting
ZPS1 Time multiplier setting
ZPS1 Definite time setting
ZPS1 Definite time reset delay
ZPS2 Threshold setting
ZPS2 Time multiplier setting
ZPS2 Definite time setting
ZPS2 Definite time reset delay
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2
NPS1 Threshold setting
NPS1 Time multiplier setting
NPS1 Definite time setting
NPS1 Definite time reset delay
NPS2 Threshold setting
NPS2 Time multiplier setting
NPS2 Definite time setting
NPS2 Definite time reset delay
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
Protection
Address
4836
440A
4837
440B
4838
4839
440C
483A
440D
483B
483C
440E
483D
440F
483E
483F
4410
4840
4411
4841
4842
Name
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
FRQ
Contents
F11
TF11
F12
TF12
DF1
F21
TF21
F22
TF22
DF2
F31
TF31
F32
TF32
DF3
F41
TF41
F42
TF42
DF4
FVBLK
 211 
F11 Threshold setting
F11 Time delay setting
F12 Threshold setting
F12 Time delay setting
DFRQ1 Threshold setting
F21 Threshold setting
F21 Time delay setting
F22 Threshold setting
F22 Time delay setting
DFRQ2 Threshold setting
F31 Threshold setting
F31 Time delay setting
F32 Threshold setting
F32 Time delay setting
DFRQ3 Threshold setting
F41 Threshold setting
F41 Time delay setting
F42 Threshold setting
F42 Time delay setting
DFRQ4 Threshold setting
FRQ Block threshold setting
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix M
Ordering
 212 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Ordering
Under/Overvoltage Relay
GRE130
Type:
Voltage Relay
Model:
- Model 410: Four pole
GRE130
2 x BIs, 4 x Bos, 1 x Relay fail
6 x BIs, 4 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
6 x BIs, 8 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail
Rating:
VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac
VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 48-110Vdc
VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 24-48Vdc
Standard and language:
IEC (English)
ANSI (English)
Chinese
Communication:
RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)
Following options can be equipped
with Model 402 and 422 only
RS485 2ports (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
RS485 2ports (Modbus/DNP3.0)
100BASE-TX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
100BASE-TX 1port (Modbus/ DNP3.0)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)
100BASE-TX 2ports (Modbus/IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
100BASE-TX 2ports (Modbus/ DNP3.0)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)
100BASE-FX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
100BASE-FX 1port (Modbus/ DNP3.0)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)
100BASE-FX 2ports (Modbus/ IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
100BASE-FX 2ports (Modbus/ DNP3.0)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)
 213 
410
411
412
1
2
A
0
1
2
10
11
20
21
A0
A1
B0
B1
C0
C1
D0
D1
A
0
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
 214 